1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
72 \use_dash_ligatures false
74 \default_output_format pdf2
76 \bibtex_command bibtex
77 \index_command default
81 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
82 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
86 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
87 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
88 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
93 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
94 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
97 \use_package amsmath 1
98 \use_package amssymb 1
101 \use_package mathdots 1
102 \use_package mathtools 1
103 \use_package mhchem 1
104 \use_package stackrel 1
105 \use_package stmaryrd 1
106 \use_package undertilde 1
108 \cite_engine_type default
112 \paperorientation portrait
117 \notefontcolor #0000ff
134 \paragraph_separation skip
137 \math_numbering_side default
138 \quotes_style english
142 \paperpagestyle default
143 \tracking_changes false
144 \output_changes false
158 by the \SpecialChar LyX
163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
165 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
166 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
167 Documentation mailing list:
168 \begin_inset CommandInset href
170 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
182 \begin_inset Newline newline
186 \begin_inset Newline newline
190 \begin_inset Note Note
193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
194 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
195 \begin_inset Newline newline
200 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
201 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
209 \begin_layout Standard
210 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
211 LatexCommand tableofcontents
218 \begin_layout Chapter
222 \begin_layout Section
223 What is \SpecialChar LyX
227 \begin_layout Standard
229 is a document preparation system.
230 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
231 scripts, publishable books, business
232 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
233 It is unlike most other
234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
241 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
243 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
244 \begin_inset Quotes eld
248 \begin_inset Quotes erd
252 \begin_inset Quotes eld
256 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
259 pt type, left justified, 5
260 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
264 \begin_inset Quotes erd
269 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
273 \begin_layout Standard
274 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
279 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
283 \begin_layout Standard
288 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
289 's philosophy: most importantly,
290 the format of all of the manuals.
291 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
292 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
298 manual describes that, too.
301 \begin_layout Section
306 \begin_layout Standard
307 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
308 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
310 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
311 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
315 \begin_layout Standard
316 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
317 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
318 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
320 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
321 only a vertical scrollbar.
322 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
323 The first case is large images.
324 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
325 image and use the option
336 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
339 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
340 this doesn't work for equations yet.
343 \begin_layout Standard
344 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
345 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
353 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
360 \begin_layout Section
364 \begin_layout Standard
365 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
367 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
369 Just select the manual you want to read from the
376 \begin_layout Section
377 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
381 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
388 \begin_layout Standard
389 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
390 can be configured via the menu
392 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
396 \begin_inset Index idx
399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
406 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
408 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
409 packages are available.
410 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
412 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
414 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
415 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
419 \begin_inset space \space{}
422 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
423 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
425 To force \SpecialChar LyX
426 to re-inspect your system, you should use
428 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
432 \begin_inset Index idx
435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
436 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
442 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
443 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
446 \begin_layout Section
449 \begin_inset CommandInset label
451 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
458 \begin_layout Standard
459 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
460 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
461 installed, but you will not be
462 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
463 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
464 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
465 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
466 document can always be output as plain text
470 \begin_layout Standard
471 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
472 or DocBook classes or packages.
473 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
474 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
477 \begin_layout Standard
478 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
479 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
480 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
483 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
491 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
492 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
495 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
499 \begin_inset Index idx
502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
503 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
511 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
518 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
522 \begin_layout Chapter
523 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
527 \begin_layout Section
528 Basic File Operations
529 \begin_inset Index idx
532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
541 \begin_layout Standard
546 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
547 in addition to some more advanced operations:
550 \begin_layout Itemize
572 \begin_layout Itemize
588 arg "buffer-new-template"
594 \begin_layout Itemize
616 \begin_layout Itemize
626 \begin_layout Itemize
640 \begin_layout Itemize
662 \begin_layout Itemize
674 arg "buffer-write-as"
680 \begin_layout Itemize
694 \begin_layout Itemize
708 \begin_layout Standard
709 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
710 a few minor differences.
713 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
724 command lists the available templates.
725 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
726 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
727 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
733 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
735 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
742 \begin_layout Standard
743 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
752 \begin_inset Quotes eld
756 \begin_inset Quotes erd
760 \begin_inset Quotes eld
764 \begin_inset Quotes erd
768 \begin_inset Quotes eld
772 \begin_inset Quotes erd
775 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
776 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
777 is just that — a big, blank space.
785 \begin_layout Standard
806 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
811 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
814 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
832 will reload the document from disk.
833 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
834 and want to restore it to the last save.
843 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
844 them as your changes.
847 \begin_layout Section
848 Basic Editing Features
849 \begin_inset Index idx
852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
861 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
868 \begin_layout Standard
869 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
870 can perform cut and paste operations
871 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
872 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
873 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
874 editing features and how to access
876 We will start with cut and paste.
879 \begin_layout Standard
880 As you might expect, the
884 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
885 various other editing features.
886 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
890 \begin_layout Itemize
896 \begin_inset Index idx
899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
928 \begin_layout Itemize
934 \begin_inset Index idx
937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
966 \begin_layout Itemize
972 \begin_inset Index idx
975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1000 \begin_layout Itemize
1004 \begin_inset space ~
1010 \begin_layout Itemize
1014 \begin_inset space ~
1020 \begin_layout Itemize
1024 \begin_inset space ~
1028 \begin_inset space ~
1034 \begin_inset Index idx
1037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1046 \begin_inset Index idx
1049 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1064 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1074 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1080 \begin_layout Standard
1081 The first three are self-explanatory.
1082 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1083 and other programs by
1104 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1105 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1110 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1111 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1112 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1113 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1114 into individual cells.
1118 \begin_inset space ~
1123 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1124 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1128 \begin_layout Standard
1132 \begin_inset space ~
1137 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1139 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1141 \begin_inset space ~
1148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1154 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1155 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1156 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1158 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1162 \begin_inset space \space{}
1165 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1166 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1169 \begin_inset space ~
1172 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1174 \begin_inset space ~
1178 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1182 \begin_inset space ~
1191 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1192 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1194 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1198 \begin_inset space ~
1203 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1204 start a new paragraph.
1205 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1206 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1211 \begin_inset space ~
1214 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1216 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1220 \begin_inset space ~
1228 \begin_inset space ~
1231 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1234 paste from the primary selection.
1235 This is normally the currently selected text.
1238 \begin_layout Standard
1241 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1243 \begin_inset space ~
1247 \begin_inset space ~
1255 \begin_inset space ~
1259 \begin_inset space ~
1265 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1271 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1274 \begin_inset space ~
1283 \begin_inset space ~
1288 button to skip the current word.
1292 \begin_inset space ~
1297 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1301 \begin_inset space ~
1306 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1308 If the toggle is set, searching for
1309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1320 will not match the word
1321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1329 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1335 Match whole words only
1337 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1338 to only find complete words, e.
1339 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1355 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1363 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1368 offers also an advanced
1371 \begin_inset space ~
1375 \begin_inset space ~
1380 feature that is described in section
1381 \begin_inset space ~
1385 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1387 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1394 \begin_layout Standard
1395 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1396 \begin_inset space \space{}
1400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1404 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1408 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1410 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1415 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1422 \begin_layout Standard
1426 arg "inset-select-all"
1429 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1430 When the cursor is inside an inset
1433 arg "inset-select-all"
1436 selects the content of the inset.
1440 arg "inset-select-all"
1443 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1448 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1451 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1455 \begin_layout Section
1457 \begin_inset Index idx
1460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1467 \begin_inset Index idx
1470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1477 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1479 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1486 \begin_layout Standard
1487 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1489 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1492 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1495 or the toolbar button
1501 to undo some mistake.
1502 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1504 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1507 or the toolbar button
1514 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1518 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1521 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1522 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1525 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1528 \begin_layout Standard
1529 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1538 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1539 This is a consequence of the 100
1540 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1543 step undo limit mentioned above.
1546 \begin_layout Standard
1555 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1557 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1561 \begin_layout Section
1563 \begin_inset Index idx
1566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1575 \begin_layout Standard
1576 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1579 \begin_layout Enumerate
1584 \begin_layout Itemize
1589 once anywhere in the edit window.
1590 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1594 \begin_layout Enumerate
1599 \begin_layout Itemize
1606 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1609 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1612 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1613 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1616 \begin_layout Itemize
1617 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1620 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1627 \begin_layout Enumerate
1628 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1632 \begin_layout Standard
1633 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1634 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1638 \begin_layout Section
1640 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1642 name "sec:Navigating"
1647 \begin_inset Index idx
1650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1659 \begin_layout Standard
1661 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1664 \begin_layout Itemize
1669 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1670 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1673 \begin_layout Itemize
1674 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1676 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1678 \begin_inset space ~
1683 or by the toolbar button
1686 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1692 \begin_layout Itemize
1693 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1695 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1698 and use the same menu to return to them.
1699 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1702 \begin_layout Standard
1706 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1711 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1714 \begin_inset space ~
1719 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1720 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1721 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1722 your last editing position.
1725 \begin_layout Standard
1730 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1734 \begin_layout Subsection
1736 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1738 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1743 \begin_inset Index idx
1746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1747 Navigating ! Outline
1753 \begin_inset Index idx
1756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1765 \begin_layout Standard
1766 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1767 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1768 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1770 \begin_inset space ~
1774 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1776 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1780 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1781 \begin_inset space ~
1785 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1787 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1792 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1796 \begin_layout Standard
1797 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1798 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1799 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1800 dialog and to modify the citation.
1803 \begin_layout Standard
1808 field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear in the outline.
1809 For example, if you are displaying the list of
1811 Labels and References
1813 and wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1815 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1819 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1822 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1825 \begin_layout Standard
1826 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1827 you further to control the display.
1832 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1833 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1839 option keeps it in the current view state.
1840 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1841 \begin_inset space ~
1844 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1845 \begin_inset space ~
1848 3, the subsections of sections
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1852 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1857 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1858 \begin_inset space ~
1862 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1864 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1872 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1875 \begin_layout Standard
1882 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1883 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1897 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1898 So, for example, you can move section
1899 \begin_inset space ~
1903 \begin_inset space ~
1906 2.4 or after section
1907 \begin_inset space ~
1912 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1925 (or the corresponding key bindings
1933 ) you can change the level of sections.
1934 So you can for example make section
1935 \begin_inset space ~
1939 \begin_inset space ~
1943 \begin_inset space ~
1949 \begin_layout Standard
1950 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1951 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1954 \begin_layout Subsection
1955 Horizontal Scrolling
1956 \begin_inset Index idx
1959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1960 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1968 \begin_layout Standard
1970 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1976 \begin_inset space \space{}
1980 \begin_inset space ~
1983 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1984 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1985 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1989 \begin_layout Standard
1990 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1994 \begin_layout Itemize
1996 is used on a small tablet computer
1999 \begin_layout Itemize
2000 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
2004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2012 \begin_inset space ~
2025 \begin_layout Itemize
2026 Math constructs with long command names
2029 \begin_layout Standard
2030 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2031 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2033 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2034 windows so that table
2035 \begin_inset space ~
2039 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2041 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2046 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2048 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2049 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2052 \begin_layout Standard
2053 \begin_inset Float table
2059 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2060 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2063 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2065 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2069 Horizontal scrolling test.
2077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2079 \begin_inset Tabular
2080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2081 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2082 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2083 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2084 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2126 \begin_layout Section
2127 Input/Word Completion
2128 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2130 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2135 \begin_inset Index idx
2138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2145 \begin_inset Index idx
2148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2179 \begin_layout Standard
2181 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2183 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2184 is used to propose completions.
2187 \begin_layout Standard
2188 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2191 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2196 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2203 \begin_inset space ~
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2216 \begin_inset space ~
2221 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2222 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2226 \begin_inset space ~
2232 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2233 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2234 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2235 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2238 \begin_layout Standard
2240 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2241 completions available.
2246 key to accept a proposed completion.
2247 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2248 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2249 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2256 \begin_layout Standard
2257 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2258 ing options for text.
2259 The special math option
2263 enables characters to be composed.
2264 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2265 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2268 , you can then input the characters
2269 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2277 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2280 to a formula to get it.
2281 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2282 of the math toolbar.
2283 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2287 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2288 's installation folder.
2289 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2298 \begin_layout Section
2300 \begin_inset Index idx
2303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2310 \begin_inset Index idx
2313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2329 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2342 \begin_inset Index idx
2345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2361 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2376 \begin_layout Standard
2377 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2391 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2394 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2398 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2399 \begin_inset space ~
2403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2405 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2412 \begin_layout Standard
2416 \begin_inset space ~
2424 \begin_inset space ~
2445 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2449 \begin_layout Labeling
2450 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2454 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2455 LatexCommand nomenclature
2457 description "Tabulator key"
2464 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2466 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2467 \begin_inset space ~
2471 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2473 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2478 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2480 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2484 , especially section
2485 \begin_inset space ~
2489 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2491 reference "subsec:Lists"
2497 If you are still confused, look in the
2502 \begin_inset Newline newline
2510 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2511 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2515 \begin_layout Labeling
2516 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2520 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2521 LatexCommand nomenclature
2523 description "Escape key"
2531 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2535 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2538 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2539 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2542 \begin_layout Labeling
2543 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2549 \begin_inset space ~
2553 \begin_inset space ~
2560 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2561 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2565 \begin_layout Standard
2566 There are three modifier keys:
2569 \begin_layout Labeling
2570 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2584 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2588 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2589 LatexCommand nomenclature
2591 description "Control key"
2596 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2597 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2625 \begin_layout Itemize
2634 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2638 \begin_layout Labeling
2639 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2645 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2657 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2658 LatexCommand nomenclature
2660 description "Shift key"
2665 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2666 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2669 \begin_layout Labeling
2670 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2688 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2689 LatexCommand nomenclature
2691 description "Alt or Meta key"
2696 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2697 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2698 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2704 \begin_inset Newline newline
2707 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2709 menu accelerator keys
2712 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2713 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2717 \begin_layout Standard
2718 For example, the sequence
2719 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2725 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset space ~
2735 \begin_inset space ~
2743 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2756 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2762 \begin_inset space ~
2768 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2778 \begin_layout Standard
2783 manual lists all other things bound to the
2791 \begin_layout Standard
2792 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2794 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2795 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2796 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2797 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2798 The \SpecialChar LyX
2799 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2800 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2801 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2803 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2804 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2812 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2819 followed by a capital
2826 \begin_layout Chapter
2829 \begin_inset Index idx
2832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Section
2844 \begin_inset Index idx
2847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2856 \begin_layout Subsection
2860 \begin_layout Standard
2861 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2862 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2863 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2864 numbering schemes, and so on.
2865 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2866 and format the title of your document differently.
2869 \begin_layout Standard
2874 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2875 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2876 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2877 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2878 picks one for you by default.
2879 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2882 \begin_layout Subsection
2884 \begin_inset Index idx
2887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2896 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2903 \begin_layout Standard
2904 You can select a class using the
2906 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2907 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2911 \begin_inset Index idx
2914 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2921 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2925 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2929 \begin_layout Standard
2930 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2935 \begin_layout Description
2936 Article for basic articles
2939 \begin_layout Description
2940 Report for basic reports
2943 \begin_layout Description
2944 Book for writing a book
2947 \begin_layout Description
2948 Letter for US-style letters
2951 \begin_layout Standard
2952 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2953 only uses if you have installed
2954 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2955 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2956 distributions will include
2958 Here are some of the classes.
2959 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2961 Special Document Classes
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2974 \begin_layout Description
2975 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2979 \begin_layout Description
2980 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2984 \begin_layout Description
2985 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2986 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2987 There are three article layouts available.
2988 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2989 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2990 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2991 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2996 sequential numbering
2997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3000 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
3001 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
3002 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
3003 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
3006 \begin_layout Description
3007 Beamer Layout for presentations
3010 \begin_layout Description
3011 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
3012 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3013 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3014 with \SpecialChar LyX
3018 \begin_layout Description
3019 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3022 \begin_layout Description
3024 \begin_inset space ~
3027 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3030 \begin_layout Description
3031 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3034 \begin_layout Description
3035 Foils Used to make transparencies
3038 \begin_layout Description
3039 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3040 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3041 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3042 with \SpecialChar LyX
3046 \begin_layout Description
3047 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3048 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3059 \begin_layout Description
3060 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3061 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3062 (Is used by this document.)
3065 \begin_layout Description
3066 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3069 \begin_layout Description
3070 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3073 \begin_layout Description
3078 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3079 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3081 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3085 \begin_layout Description
3086 Slides Used to make transparencies
3089 \begin_layout Description
3091 \begin_inset space ~
3094 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3095 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3098 \begin_layout Description
3099 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3102 \begin_layout Standard
3103 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3105 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3107 Special Document Classes
3114 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3115 of the document classes.
3118 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3122 \begin_layout Standard
3123 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3128 \begin_inset Index idx
3131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3148 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3149 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3151 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3154 \begin_layout Standard
3157 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3162 , are highly specialized.
3164 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3165 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3166 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3167 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3168 by some document class.
3169 There are just too many of them.
3170 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3173 \begin_layout Standard
3174 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3175 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3182 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3183 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3184 document class for a new file.
3186 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3189 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3196 manual for information on how to install them.
3197 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3203 \begin_layout Standard
3204 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3205 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3206 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3207 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3208 class files to be used for dissertation
3209 s submitted to those universities.
3210 The \SpecialChar LyX
3211 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3213 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3217 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3223 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3226 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3228 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3230 name "subsec:Modules"
3235 \begin_inset Index idx
3238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3247 \begin_layout Standard
3248 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3249 chosen document class.
3250 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3251 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3258 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3262 \begin_inset Index idx
3265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3272 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3276 \begin_layout Standard
3277 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3278 packages or file format converters that are not always
3279 installed by default.
3281 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3282 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3283 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3284 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3286 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3287 file without the missing prerequisites.
3288 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3289 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3292 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3296 \begin_inset Index idx
3299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3300 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3306 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3311 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3314 \begin_layout Standard
3315 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3323 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3325 will advise you about these things.
3333 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3335 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3337 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3342 \begin_inset Index idx
3345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3346 Document ! Local Layout
3354 \begin_layout Standard
3355 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3356 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3357 : They are intended to be used in
3358 a variety of different documents.
3359 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3360 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3361 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3362 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3363 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3365 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3367 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3371 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3383 manual for information on how to use it.
3386 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3390 \begin_layout Standard
3391 Each class has a default set of options.
3392 Here's a quick table describing them:
3395 \begin_layout Standard
3396 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3402 \begin_layout Standard
3404 \begin_inset Tabular
3405 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3406 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3407 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3408 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3409 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3410 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3411 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3458 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3461 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3513 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3640 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3643 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3731 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3822 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3865 \begin_layout Standard
3866 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3872 \begin_layout Standard
3873 You're probably also wondering what
3874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3878 \begin_inset space ~
3882 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3886 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3887 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3892 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3897 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3907 headings, there are also
3915 headings, and so on.
3916 We will describe these headings fully in section
3917 \begin_inset space ~
3921 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3923 reference "subsec:Headings"
3930 \begin_layout Subsection
3932 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3934 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3939 \begin_inset Index idx
3942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3949 \begin_inset Index idx
3952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3961 \begin_layout Standard
3962 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3964 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3971 \begin_inset space ~
3979 \begin_inset space ~
3984 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3986 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3987 doesn't support special options you want to
3988 use for your document.
3989 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3990 -class and its options, you have to read
3994 \begin_layout Standard
3998 \begin_inset space ~
4005 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4011 \begin_inset space ~
4016 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4017 You can choose between the following five options:
4020 \begin_layout Labeling
4021 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4026 Use default page style of current class.
4029 \begin_layout Labeling
4030 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4035 No page numbers or headings.
4038 \begin_layout Labeling
4039 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4047 \begin_layout Labeling
4048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4053 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4054 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4055 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4056 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4059 \begin_layout Labeling
4060 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4065 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4066 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4072 \begin_inset Index idx
4075 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4083 How they are defined is explained in section
4084 \begin_inset space ~
4088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4090 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4097 \begin_layout Standard
4098 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4099 \begin_inset space ~
4103 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4105 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4112 \begin_layout Subsection
4113 Paper Size and Orientation
4114 \begin_inset Index idx
4117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4118 Document ! Paper size
4124 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4126 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4133 \begin_layout Standard
4134 You can find the following options in the menu
4137 \begin_inset space ~
4144 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4148 \begin_inset Index idx
4151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4160 \begin_layout Labeling
4161 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4165 \begin_inset space ~
4170 What size paper to print on.
4175 \begin_layout Itemize
4181 \begin_layout Itemize
4187 \begin_layout Itemize
4193 \begin_layout Itemize
4199 \begin_layout Itemize
4202 US letter, US legal, US executive
4205 \begin_layout Itemize
4211 \begin_layout Itemize
4218 \begin_layout Labeling
4219 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4224 To choose whether to output as
4235 \begin_layout Labeling
4236 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4240 \begin_inset space ~
4245 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4246 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4249 \begin_layout Subsection
4251 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4253 name "subsec:Margins"
4258 \begin_inset Index idx
4261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4268 \begin_inset Index idx
4271 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4280 \begin_layout Standard
4281 Paper margins are set in the menu
4283 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4287 \begin_inset Index idx
4290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4299 \begin_layout Standard
4300 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4301 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4302 the paper format and the font size into account.
4305 \begin_layout Subsection
4309 \begin_layout Standard
4310 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4316 That includes the paragraph environments.
4317 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4318 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4319 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4321 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4322 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4326 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4330 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4332 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4333 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4334 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4337 \begin_layout Section
4338 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4339 \begin_inset Index idx
4342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4343 Paragraph ! Indentation
4351 \begin_layout Subsection
4353 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4355 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4362 \begin_layout Standard
4363 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4364 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4367 \begin_layout Standard
4368 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4369 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4370 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4371 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4375 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4381 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4382 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4383 language than English.
4385 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4388 \begin_layout Standard
4389 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4390 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4391 into \SpecialChar LyX
4393 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4396 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4398 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4399 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4400 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4407 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4408 goes to produce a printable file.
4413 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4415 gives you the ability globally to change
4419 these pre-coded spacings.
4420 We will explain more later.
4423 \begin_layout Subsection
4424 Paragraph Separation
4425 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4427 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4432 \begin_inset Index idx
4435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4436 Paragraph ! Separation
4444 \begin_layout Standard
4452 \begin_inset space ~
4460 \begin_inset space ~
4467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4471 \begin_inset Index idx
4474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4480 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4483 \begin_layout Subsection
4487 \begin_layout Standard
4488 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4491 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4493 \begin_inset space ~
4498 dialog and toggle the
4501 \begin_inset space ~
4506 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4509 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4513 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4514 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4518 \begin_layout Standard
4519 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4520 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4523 \begin_layout Subsection
4525 \begin_inset Index idx
4528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4529 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4537 \begin_layout Standard
4540 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4544 \begin_inset Index idx
4547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4560 \begin_inset space ~
4569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4570 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4576 \begin_inset Index idx
4579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4586 installed to use this feature.
4591 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4593 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4595 \begin_inset space ~
4600 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4601 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4604 \begin_layout Section
4605 Paragraph Environments
4606 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4608 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4613 \begin_inset Index idx
4616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4617 Paragraph ! Environments
4623 \begin_inset Index idx
4626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4627 Paragraph environments|(
4635 \begin_layout Subsection
4639 \begin_layout Standard
4640 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4643 \begin_layout Standard
4652 } \SpecialChar ldots
4662 \begin_inset Newline newline
4665 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4667 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4668 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4669 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4678 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4681 \begin_layout Standard
4682 A paragraph environment is simply a
4683 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4687 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4690 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4691 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4692 scheme, labels, and so on.
4693 Additionally, you can
4694 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4698 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4701 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4702 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4703 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4704 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4706 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4708 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4711 \begin_layout Standard
4712 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4713 \begin_inset Graphics
4714 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4720 at the left end of the toolbar.
4722 will change the environment of the
4726 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4727 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4728 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4732 \begin_layout Standard
4741 create a new paragraph using the
4745 paragraph environment.
4747 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4751 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4754 because if you are in one of these environments:
4757 \begin_layout Itemize
4763 \begin_layout Itemize
4769 \begin_layout Itemize
4775 \begin_layout Itemize
4781 \begin_layout Itemize
4787 \begin_layout Itemize
4793 \begin_layout Itemize
4799 \begin_layout Standard
4801 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4805 , rather than resetting it to
4810 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4811 \begin_inset space ~
4815 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4817 reference "sec:Nesting"
4824 \begin_layout Subsection
4828 \begin_layout Standard
4829 The default paragraph environment is
4834 It creates a plain paragraph.
4836 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4837 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4838 this manual) are in the
4845 \begin_layout Standard
4846 You can nest a paragraph using the
4850 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4858 \begin_layout Subsection
4860 \begin_inset Index idx
4863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4872 \begin_layout Standard
4873 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4874 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4876 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4880 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4883 for thanks or contact information.
4884 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4885 places all of this on a separate page
4886 along with today's date.
4887 For other types of documents, the title
4888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4895 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4899 \begin_layout Standard
4901 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4915 Here's how you use them:
4918 \begin_layout Itemize
4919 Put the title of your document in the
4926 \begin_layout Itemize
4927 Put the author name in the
4934 \begin_layout Itemize
4935 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4936 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4942 Note that using this environment is optional.
4943 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4944 will automatically insert today's date.
4945 If you don't want a date, use the option
4947 Suppress default date on front page
4951 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4952 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4954 \begin_inset space ~
4962 \begin_layout Standard
4963 You can use footnotes to insert
4964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4971 or contact information.
4974 \begin_layout Subsection
4976 \begin_inset Index idx
4979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4986 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4988 name "subsec:Headings"
4995 \begin_layout Standard
4996 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4998 takes care of the numbering for you.
5001 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5003 \begin_inset Index idx
5006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5007 Section headings ! Numbered
5015 \begin_layout Standard
5016 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5020 \begin_layout Enumerate
5026 \begin_layout Enumerate
5032 \begin_layout Enumerate
5038 \begin_layout Enumerate
5044 \begin_layout Enumerate
5050 \begin_layout Enumerate
5056 \begin_layout Enumerate
5062 \begin_layout Standard
5064 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5065 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5066 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5069 \begin_layout Standard
5070 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5071 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5072 You group the book into chapters.
5074 does a similar grouping:
5077 \begin_layout Itemize
5082 is divided into either
5093 \begin_layout Itemize
5105 \begin_layout Itemize
5117 \begin_layout Itemize
5129 \begin_layout Itemize
5141 \begin_layout Itemize
5153 \begin_layout Standard
5154 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5162 Not all document types use the
5166 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5171 is the top-level heading.
5179 \begin_layout Standard
5184 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5185 labels it with its number,
5186 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5188 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5200 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5202 \begin_inset Index idx
5205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5206 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5214 \begin_layout Standard
5215 The unnumbered section headings have a
5216 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5220 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5223 at the end of their name.
5224 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5225 the table of contents, see section
5226 \begin_inset space ~
5230 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5239 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5240 Changing the Numbering
5241 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5243 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5250 \begin_layout Standard
5251 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5252 in the Table of Contents.
5253 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5255 Just as certain classes start with
5269 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5279 This is something you can change.
5282 \begin_layout Standard
5285 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5289 \begin_inset Index idx
5292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5301 \begin_inset space ~
5305 \begin_inset space ~
5310 you will see two counters.
5315 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5316 numbers a section heading.
5317 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5321 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5322 Short Titles of Headings
5323 \begin_inset Index idx
5326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5327 Section headings ! Short titles
5333 \begin_inset Argument 1
5336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5343 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5345 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5352 \begin_layout Standard
5353 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5354 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5355 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5356 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5359 \begin_layout Standard
5361 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5362 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5363 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5364 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5367 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5369 \begin_inset space ~
5375 This will insert a box labeled
5376 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5380 \begin_inset space ~
5384 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5387 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5388 This also works for captions inside floats.
5389 There can only be one short title per title.
5392 \begin_layout Standard
5393 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5396 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5400 \begin_layout Standard
5401 The following information applies to all section headings:
5404 \begin_layout Itemize
5405 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5408 \begin_layout Itemize
5409 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5412 \begin_layout Itemize
5413 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5416 \begin_layout Itemize
5417 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5420 \begin_layout Subsection
5424 \begin_layout Standard
5426 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5440 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5441 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5442 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5443 the text they contain.
5444 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5452 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5455 \begin_layout Standard
5456 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5465 when you start a new paragraph.
5466 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5470 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5471 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5472 have to change back to the
5476 environment yourself.
5479 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5481 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5488 \begin_inset Index idx
5491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5500 \begin_layout Standard
5501 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5502 time for the differences.
5511 are identical except for one difference:
5515 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5524 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5527 \begin_layout Standard
5528 Here's an example of the
5541 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5543 See – no indentation!
5547 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5548 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5549 the other paragraph.
5552 \begin_layout Standard
5553 Here's another example, this time in the
5560 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5567 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5568 the first line, then
5572 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5576 you were quoting other text.
5579 \begin_layout Quotation
5580 Here's a new paragraph.
5581 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5582 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5585 \begin_layout Standard
5586 As the examples show,
5590 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5591 They should put quotes in the
5596 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5600 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5603 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5605 \begin_inset Index idx
5608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5615 \begin_inset Index idx
5618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5625 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5634 \begin_layout Standard
5639 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5645 \begin_inset Newline newline
5648 Which I did not rehearse!
5652 It could be much worse.
5653 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5655 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5656 indented a bit more than the first.
5657 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5663 \begin_inset Newline newline
5666 And make things look fine
5667 \begin_inset Newline newline
5673 arg "newline-insert newline"
5679 \begin_layout Standard
5684 does not indent both margins.
5685 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5686 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5689 arg "newline-insert newline"
5695 \begin_layout Subsection
5697 \begin_inset Index idx
5700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5707 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5716 \begin_layout Standard
5718 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5728 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5729 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5738 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5739 lets you provide your own label.
5740 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5741 describing some general features of all four of them.
5744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5748 \begin_layout Standard
5749 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5751 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5752 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5761 reset the environment to
5765 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5766 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5767 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5771 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5775 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5782 \begin_layout Standard
5783 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5784 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5785 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5787 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5788 you read all of section
5789 \begin_inset space ~
5793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5795 reference "sec:Nesting"
5802 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5804 \begin_inset Index idx
5807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5814 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5823 \begin_layout Standard
5824 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5828 paragraph environment.
5829 It has the following properties:
5832 \begin_layout Itemize
5833 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5837 \begin_layout Itemize
5839 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5842 \begin_layout Itemize
5843 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5847 \begin_layout Itemize
5848 The items can have any length.
5850 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5851 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5858 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 environment inside another
5867 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5871 \begin_layout Itemize
5872 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5875 \begin_layout Itemize
5877 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5880 \begin_layout Itemize
5882 \begin_inset space ~
5886 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5888 reference "sec:Nesting"
5892 for a full explanation of nesting.
5896 \begin_layout Standard
5897 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5906 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5909 \begin_layout Standard
5910 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5911 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the first level
5919 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5923 \begin_layout Itemize
5924 The label for the second level is a dash.
5928 \begin_layout Itemize
5929 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5933 \begin_layout Itemize
5934 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5938 \begin_layout Itemize
5939 Back out to the third level.
5943 \begin_layout Itemize
5944 Back to the second level.
5948 \begin_layout Itemize
5949 Back to the outermost level.
5952 \begin_layout Standard
5953 These are the default labels for an
5958 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5960 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5963 dialog in the submenu
5968 \begin_inset Index idx
5971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5977 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5981 \begin_layout Standard
5982 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5983 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5985 \begin_inset space ~
5989 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5991 reference "sec:Nesting"
5998 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6000 \begin_inset Index idx
6003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6010 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6012 name "sec:Enumerate"
6019 \begin_layout Standard
6024 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6025 It has these properties:
6028 \begin_layout Enumerate
6029 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6033 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6038 \begin_layout Enumerate
6040 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6043 \begin_layout Enumerate
6048 environment resets the counter to one.
6051 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 \begin_layout Enumerate
6065 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6066 Items can have any length.
6069 \begin_layout Enumerate
6070 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6073 \begin_layout Enumerate
6074 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6077 \begin_layout Enumerate
6078 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6082 \begin_layout Standard
6091 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6093 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6094 labels the four different levels in an
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The first level of an
6106 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6115 \begin_layout Enumerate
6116 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6120 \begin_layout Enumerate
6121 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6124 \begin_layout Enumerate
6125 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6130 \begin_layout Enumerate
6131 Back to the third level
6135 \begin_layout Enumerate
6136 Back to the second level.
6140 \begin_layout Enumerate
6141 Back to the outermost level.
6144 \begin_layout Standard
6145 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6149 environment, see section
6150 \begin_inset space ~
6154 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6156 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6161 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6165 \begin_layout Standard
6166 There is more to nesting
6170 environments than we've stated here.
6171 You should read section
6172 \begin_inset space ~
6176 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6178 reference "sec:Nesting"
6182 to learn more about nesting.
6185 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6187 \begin_inset Index idx
6190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6199 \begin_layout Standard
6200 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6204 list has no fixed label.
6205 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6211 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6214 of the first line as the label.
6218 \begin_layout Description
6219 Example: This is an example of the
6226 \begin_layout Standard
6228 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6232 \begin_layout Standard
6234 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6238 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6241 it is meant that the first usage of the
6245 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6247 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6255 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6260 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6261 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6263 \begin_inset space ~
6269 \begin_inset space ~
6273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6275 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6279 for more information.) Here is an example:
6282 \begin_layout Description
6284 \begin_inset space ~
6287 Example: This one shows how to use a
6290 \begin_inset space ~
6302 \begin_layout Description
6303 Usage: You should use the
6307 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6308 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6310 It's not a good idea to use a
6314 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6315 You're better off using
6327 paragraphs into them.
6330 \begin_layout Description
6331 Nesting: You can nest
6335 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6339 \begin_layout Standard
6340 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6341 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6342 them from the first line.
6345 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6347 \begin_inset Index idx
6350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6359 \begin_layout Standard
6364 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6365 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6369 \begin_layout Standard
6378 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6380 Here are its properties:
6383 \begin_layout Labeling
6384 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6386 \begin_inset space ~
6389 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6391 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6395 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6398 of each line as the item label.
6403 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6404 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6405 space as described above.
6408 \begin_layout Labeling
6409 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6410 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses different margins for the item label and the
6412 body of the item text.
6413 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6414 label width plus a little extra space.
6418 \begin_layout Labeling
6419 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6421 \begin_inset space ~
6424 width \SpecialChar LyX
6425 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6426 If the label width is larger, the label
6427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6434 into the first line.
6435 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6436 margin of the rest of the item text.
6439 \begin_layout Labeling
6440 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6442 \begin_inset space ~
6445 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6450 environment has the same left margin.
6451 \begin_inset Newline newline
6454 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6457 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6459 \begin_inset space ~
6464 dialog (toolbar button
6467 arg "layout-paragraph"
6474 \begin_inset space ~
6479 determines the default label width.
6480 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6482 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6489 multiple times instead.
6490 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6500 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6503 \begin_inset space ~
6508 every time you alter a label in a
6513 \begin_inset Newline newline
6516 The predefined default width is the length of
6517 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6521 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6525 \begin_inset space ~
6531 \begin_layout Standard
6536 list the same way as the
6540 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6546 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6550 \begin_layout Standard
6555 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6556 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6558 \begin_inset space ~
6562 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6564 reference "sec:Nesting"
6568 to learn about nesting.
6571 \begin_layout Standard
6572 There is yet another feature of the
6576 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6577 left-justifies the item labels by
6579 You can use additional
6583 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6584 justifies the item label.
6589 are documented in section
6590 \begin_inset space ~
6594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6596 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6601 Here are some examples:
6604 \begin_layout Labeling
6605 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6606 Left The default for
6613 \begin_layout Labeling
6614 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6615 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6622 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6625 \begin_layout Labeling
6626 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6627 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6631 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6638 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6641 \begin_layout Subsection
6643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6645 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6650 \begin_inset Index idx
6653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6662 \begin_layout Standard
6663 The features described in this section require that the module
6665 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6667 is loaded in the document settings.
6668 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6674 \begin_inset Index idx
6677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6687 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6688 Custom Enumerate Lists
6689 \begin_inset Index idx
6692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6693 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6701 \begin_layout Standard
6703 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6706 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6709 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6710 There you add the command
6713 \begin_layout Standard
6721 \begin_layout Standard
6733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6734 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6735 Code, look at section
6736 \begin_inset space ~
6740 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6742 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6755 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6762 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6763 For capital Roman numerals replace
6775 in the command above.
6776 For Arabic numerals use
6784 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6788 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6791 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6806 \begin_layout Standard
6808 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6816 You can only number 26
6817 \begin_inset space ~
6820 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6828 \begin_layout Standard
6829 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6830 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6833 \begin_layout Standard
6834 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6837 \begin_layout Enumerate
6838 \begin_inset Argument 1
6841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6867 \begin_layout Enumerate
6868 \begin_inset Argument 1
6871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6875 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6894 \begin_layout Enumerate
6899 \begin_layout Enumerate
6900 \begin_inset Argument 1
6903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6927 \begin_layout Enumerate
6928 \begin_inset Argument 1
6931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6957 \begin_layout Standard
6958 For this list these commands were used:
6961 \begin_layout Standard
6972 \begin_inset Newline newline
6980 \begin_inset Newline newline
6988 \begin_inset Newline newline
6998 \begin_layout Standard
7005 makes the label emphasized and
7014 \begin_layout Standard
7015 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7023 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7024 lists until you change the definition.
7032 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7034 \begin_inset Index idx
7037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7038 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7046 \begin_layout Standard
7047 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7050 \begin_layout Enumerate
7051 \begin_inset Argument 1
7054 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7058 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7073 \begin_inset Note Note
7076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7077 goes back to default numbering
7085 \begin_layout Enumerate
7089 \begin_layout Standard
7093 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7097 \begin_layout Standard
7098 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7103 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7104 to indicate that it is a resumed
7105 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7106 , but in the output.
7109 \begin_layout Standard
7110 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7118 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7127 \begin_layout Standard
7128 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7130 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7131 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7132 of a normal enumeration.
7133 There, insert the command
7136 \begin_layout Standard
7142 \begin_layout Standard
7147 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7151 \begin_layout Enumerate
7155 \begin_layout Enumerate
7159 \begin_layout Standard
7160 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7163 \begin_layout Enumerate
7164 \begin_inset Argument 1
7167 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7183 This enumeration starts at 4
7186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7188 \begin_inset Index idx
7191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7203 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7206 \begin_layout Itemize
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 with standard spacing
7214 \begin_layout Standard
7215 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7217 Add there the command
7221 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7224 \begin_layout Itemize
7225 \begin_inset Argument 1
7228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7247 \begin_layout Itemize
7251 \begin_layout Itemize
7255 \begin_layout Standard
7256 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7263 \begin_inset Index idx
7266 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7274 For more information see its documentation,
7275 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7285 \begin_layout Standard
7286 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7288 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7289 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7290 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7293 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7296 \begin_layout Enumerate
7297 \begin_inset Argument 1
7300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7308 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7321 \begin_layout Enumerate
7322 with negative indentation
7325 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7326 Further Customization
7327 \begin_inset Index idx
7330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7331 Lists ! Customization
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7340 You can also change the style of description lists.
7344 \begin_layout Standard
7350 \begin_layout Standard
7351 changes the description label font, the command
7354 \begin_layout Standard
7360 \begin_layout Standard
7361 sets the list style.
7364 \begin_layout Standard
7365 An example where the command
7368 \begin_layout Standard
7373 itshape, style=nextline
7376 \begin_layout Standard
7380 \begin_layout Description
7382 \begin_inset space ~
7386 \begin_inset Argument 1
7389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7395 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7397 itshape, style=nextline
7407 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7408 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7412 \begin_layout Description
7414 \begin_inset space ~
7417 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7418 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7419 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7422 \begin_layout Standard
7423 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7429 \begin_inset Index idx
7432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7440 For more information see its documentation
7441 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7451 \begin_layout Subsection
7453 \begin_inset Index idx
7456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7470 Address: An Overview
7473 \begin_layout Standard
7474 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7475 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7489 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7490 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7491 gags on the document.
7492 In contrast, you can use the
7499 \begin_inset space ~
7504 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7505 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7509 \begin_layout Standard
7510 Of course, you're not limited to using
7517 \begin_inset space ~
7526 \begin_inset space ~
7531 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7532 some European academic papers.
7535 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7537 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7539 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7546 \begin_layout Standard
7551 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7552 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7556 \begin_inset space ~
7561 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7562 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7563 Here's an example of each:
7566 \begin_layout Right Address
7568 \begin_inset Newline newline
7572 \begin_inset Newline newline
7576 \begin_inset Newline newline
7579 When is it? What is today?
7582 \begin_layout Standard
7586 \begin_inset space ~
7592 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7594 the largest block of text on a single line.
7595 Here's an example of the
7602 \begin_layout Address
7604 \begin_inset Newline newline
7607 Where do I send this
7608 \begin_inset Newline newline
7611 Your post office and country
7614 \begin_layout Standard
7615 As you can see, both
7622 \begin_inset space ~
7627 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7632 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7633 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7639 This makes sense, since
7647 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7648 Thus, you have to use
7655 arg "newline-insert newline"
7660 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7661 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7667 \begin_inset space ~
7672 ) to start a new line in an
7679 \begin_inset space ~
7687 \begin_layout Subsection
7691 \begin_layout Standard
7692 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7693 or list of references.
7695 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7698 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7700 \begin_inset Index idx
7703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7712 \begin_layout Standard
7717 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7718 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7719 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7720 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7734 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7735 The book document classes ignores the
7739 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7743 in a letter document class.
7746 \begin_layout Standard
7751 environment does several things for you.
7752 First, it puts the centered label
7753 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7757 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7761 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7763 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7764 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7765 the subsequent text.
7766 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7768 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7772 \begin_layout Standard
7773 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7777 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7778 The new paragraph will still be in the
7783 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7784 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7787 \begin_layout Standard
7788 \begin_inset Float figure
7793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7795 \begin_inset Graphics
7796 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7803 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7804 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7807 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7809 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7830 \begin_layout Standard
7831 We would love to demonstrate the
7835 environment, but since this document is in the
7836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7843 class, we can't do this.
7844 We inserted it therefore as figure
7845 \begin_inset space ~
7849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7851 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7856 If you have never heard of an
7857 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7864 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7867 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7869 \begin_inset Index idx
7872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7879 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7881 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7888 \begin_layout Standard
7893 environment is used to list references.
7894 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7895 only use it at the end of the document.
7907 \begin_layout Standard
7908 When you first open a
7912 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7913 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7914 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7918 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7922 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7926 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7929 depending on the document class.
7930 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7931 Each paragraph of the
7935 environment is a bibliography entry.
7940 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7941 Each new paragraph is still in the
7948 \begin_layout Standard
7949 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7950 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7952 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7954 handling, have a look at section
7955 \begin_inset space ~
7959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7961 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7968 \begin_layout Subsection
7969 Special Environments
7972 \begin_layout Standard
7974 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7975 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7983 \begin_inset Index idx
7986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7996 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
8003 \begin_layout Standard
8009 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
8011 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8016 key as a fixed whitespace.
8020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8033 \begin_inset space ~
8038 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8056 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8059 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8062 arg "newline-insert newline"
8079 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8080 So, when you finish using the
8085 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8086 Also, you can nest the
8091 environment inside of others.
8094 \begin_layout Standard
8095 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8098 \begin_layout Itemize
8102 arg "newline-insert newline"
8105 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8106 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8110 \begin_inset space \space{}
8120 arg "newline-insert newline"
8126 \begin_layout Itemize
8130 arg "newline-insert newline"
8140 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8146 \begin_layout Itemize
8147 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8148 You must put at least one
8152 in any line you want blank.
8153 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8157 \begin_layout Itemize
8158 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8162 since that will insert
8167 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8170 arg "self-insert \""
8176 \begin_layout Standard
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8184 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8188 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8192 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8196 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8197 printf("Hello World!
8202 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8206 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8210 \begin_layout Standard
8211 This is just the standard
8212 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8216 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8223 \begin_layout Standard
8229 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8231 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8232 as if you used a typewriter.
8233 \begin_inset Index idx
8236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8237 Paragraph environments|)
8242 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8245 Program Code Listings
8250 \begin_inset space ~
8258 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8262 \begin_inset Index idx
8265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8274 \begin_layout Standard
8279 environment is similar to the
8284 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8285 computer console text.
8290 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8304 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8305 you can have empty lines.
8318 \begin_layout Itemize
8319 have a certain language and a text style
8322 \begin_layout Itemize
8323 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8324 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8325 and \SpecialChar TeX
8329 \begin_layout Standard
8330 Because of these properties
8334 works like a typewriter.
8338 \begin_layout Verbatim
8342 \begin_layout Verbatim
8345 The following 2 lines are empty:
8348 \begin_layout Verbatim
8352 \begin_layout Verbatim
8356 \begin_layout Verbatim
8357 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8362 \begin_layout Standard
8367 environment is identical to
8371 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8372 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8379 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8383 \begin_layout Section
8384 Nesting Environments
8385 \begin_inset Index idx
8388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8389 Nesting ! Environments
8395 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8404 \begin_layout Subsection
8408 \begin_layout Standard
8410 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8412 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8414 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8416 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8422 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8428 \begin_layout Enumerate
8432 \begin_layout Enumerate
8437 \begin_layout Enumerate
8441 \begin_layout Enumerate
8446 \begin_layout Enumerate
8450 \begin_layout Standard
8451 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8452 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8454 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8460 \begin_inset space ~
8468 \begin_inset space ~
8472 \begin_inset space ~
8477 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8479 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8482 arg "depth-increment"
8488 arg "depth-decrement"
8502 arg "depth-increment"
8508 arg "depth-decrement"
8512 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8513 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8517 \begin_layout Standard
8518 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8519 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8520 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8521 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8522 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8525 \begin_layout Standard
8526 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8528 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8530 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8533 \begin_layout Subsection
8534 What You Can and Can't Nest
8537 \begin_layout Standard
8538 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8539 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8542 \begin_layout Standard
8543 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8544 than a simple yes or no.
8545 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8548 \begin_layout Itemize
8549 Completely unnestable
8552 \begin_layout Itemize
8553 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8558 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8562 \begin_layout Standard
8563 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8564 environments have them:
8567 \begin_layout Description
8568 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8569 Can't nest into them.
8573 \begin_layout Itemize
8579 \begin_layout Itemize
8585 \begin_layout Itemize
8591 \begin_layout Itemize
8597 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Description
8606 \begin_inset space ~
8609 Nestable You can nest them.
8610 You can nest other things into them.
8614 \begin_layout Itemize
8620 \begin_layout Itemize
8626 \begin_layout Itemize
8632 \begin_layout Itemize
8638 \begin_layout Itemize
8644 \begin_layout Itemize
8650 \begin_layout Itemize
8656 \begin_layout Itemize
8663 \begin_layout Itemize
8669 \begin_layout Itemize
8676 \begin_layout Description
8677 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8678 You can't nest anything into them.
8682 \begin_layout Itemize
8688 \begin_layout Itemize
8694 \begin_layout Itemize
8700 \begin_layout Itemize
8706 \begin_layout Itemize
8712 \begin_layout Itemize
8718 \begin_layout Itemize
8724 \begin_layout Itemize
8730 \begin_layout Itemize
8736 \begin_layout Itemize
8742 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_layout Itemize
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8760 \begin_layout Itemize
8764 \begin_inset space ~
8770 \begin_layout Itemize
8777 \begin_layout Standard
8778 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8781 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8786 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8796 \begin_inset space ~
8799 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8800 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8801 nested section headings violate this.
8809 \begin_layout Subsection
8810 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8811 \begin_inset Index idx
8814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8815 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8823 \begin_layout Standard
8824 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8825 affected by nesting anyhow.
8829 \begin_layout Itemize
8833 \begin_layout Itemize
8837 \begin_layout Itemize
8841 \begin_layout Standard
8843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8851 Figures and tables in
8855 are not affected by this.
8860 Have a look at section
8861 \begin_inset space ~
8865 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8867 reference "sec:Floats"
8871 for more information about
8878 \begin_layout Standard
8880 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8881 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8885 \begin_layout Standard
8886 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8887 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8891 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8894 of its own, it behaves just like a
8895 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8899 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8902 paragraph environment.
8903 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8907 \begin_layout Standard
8908 Here's an example with a table:
8911 \begin_layout Enumerate
8916 \begin_layout Enumerate
8917 This is (a) and it's nested.
8921 \begin_layout Standard
8922 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8928 \begin_layout Standard
8930 \begin_inset Tabular
8931 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8932 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8933 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8934 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8992 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9018 \begin_layout Standard
9019 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9026 \begin_layout Enumerate
9028 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9032 \begin_layout Enumerate
9036 \begin_layout Standard
9037 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9040 \begin_layout Enumerate
9045 \begin_layout Enumerate
9046 This is (a) and it's nested.
9050 \begin_layout Standard
9051 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9057 \begin_layout Standard
9059 \begin_inset Tabular
9060 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9061 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9062 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9063 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9065 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9147 \begin_layout Standard
9148 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9154 \begin_layout Enumerate
9161 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9168 \begin_layout Standard
9169 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9177 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9180 \begin_layout Enumerate
9185 \begin_layout Enumerate
9186 This is (a) and it's nested.
9189 \begin_layout Standard
9190 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9196 \begin_layout Standard
9198 \begin_inset Tabular
9199 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9200 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9201 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9202 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9287 \begin_layout Standard
9288 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9294 \begin_layout Enumerate
9296 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9303 \begin_layout Enumerate
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9314 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9315 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9319 \begin_layout Subsection
9320 Usage and General Features
9323 \begin_layout Standard
9324 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9325 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9334 is the innermost possible depth.
9335 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9338 \begin_layout Enumerate
9339 level #1 – outermost
9343 \begin_layout Enumerate
9348 \begin_layout Enumerate
9353 \begin_layout Enumerate
9358 \begin_layout Itemize
9363 \begin_layout Itemize
9372 \begin_layout Standard
9373 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9374 both of them in the example.
9375 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9385 For example, if we tried to nest another
9390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9397 , we would get errors.
9400 \begin_layout Subsection
9402 \begin_inset Index idx
9405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9414 \begin_layout Standard
9415 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9416 We have several examples of nested environments.
9417 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9421 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9422 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9425 \begin_layout Labeling
9426 \labelwidthstring MMM
9427 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9436 \begin_layout Labeling
9437 \labelwidthstring MMM
9438 #2-a This is level #2.
9439 We created it by using
9442 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9448 arg "depth-increment"
9455 \begin_layout Labeling
9456 \labelwidthstring MMM
9457 #3-a This is level #3.
9458 This time, we just enter
9465 arg "depth-increment"
9469 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9473 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9479 arg "depth-increment"
9486 \begin_layout Standard
9491 environment, nested inside of
9492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9496 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9500 So, it's at level #4.
9501 We did this by entering
9504 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9510 arg "depth-increment"
9513 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9518 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9534 \begin_layout Standard
9539 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9542 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9548 \begin_layout Labeling
9549 \labelwidthstring MMM
9550 #4-a This is level #4.
9554 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9557 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9562 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9566 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9571 keep nesting things inside
9572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9583 \begin_layout Labeling
9584 \labelwidthstring MMM
9585 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9590 \begin_layout Labeling
9591 \labelwidthstring MMM
9592 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9593 and this is level #6.
9594 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9598 \begin_layout Labeling
9599 \labelwidthstring MMM
9600 #5-b Back to level #5.
9604 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9610 arg "depth-decrement"
9617 \begin_layout Labeling
9618 \labelwidthstring MMM
9622 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9628 arg "depth-decrement"
9631 , we're back at level #4.
9635 \begin_layout Labeling
9636 \labelwidthstring MMM
9637 #3-b Back to level #3.
9638 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9642 \begin_layout Labeling
9643 \labelwidthstring MMM
9644 #2-b Back to level #2.
9649 \begin_layout Labeling
9650 \labelwidthstring MMM
9651 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9652 After this sentence, we will enter
9656 and change the paragraph environment back to
9663 \begin_layout Standard
9664 We could have also used the
9680 environment in place of the
9685 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9689 Example 2: Inheritance
9692 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9693 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9696 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9705 arg "depth-increment"
9709 \begin_inset Newline newline
9712 which, we will change to the
9720 \begin_layout Enumerate
9725 environment, at level #2.
9728 \begin_layout Enumerate
9729 Notice how the nested
9733 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9737 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9741 \begin_layout Standard
9742 We ended this example by entering
9747 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9751 and reset the nesting depth by using
9754 arg "depth-decrement"
9760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9761 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9770 \begin_inset Argument 1
9773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9774 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9782 \begin_layout Enumerate
9783 This is level #1, in an
9787 paragraph environment.
9788 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9792 \begin_layout Enumerate
9797 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9803 arg "depth-increment"
9807 Now, what happens if we nest an
9811 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9812 label be? An asterisk?
9816 \begin_layout Itemize
9826 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9827 So, its label is a bullet.
9828 (We got here by using
9831 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9837 arg "depth-increment"
9840 , then changing the environment to
9848 \begin_layout Itemize
9849 Here's level #4, produced using
9852 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9858 arg "depth-increment"
9862 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9867 \begin_layout Enumerate
9870 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9875 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9879 , because we are in the
9887 environment (that is, it is an
9902 \begin_layout Enumerate
9907 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9908 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9912 \begin_layout Enumerate
9913 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9919 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9922 \begin_layout Enumerate
9926 arg "depth-decrement"
9929 to decrease the depth after the next
9932 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9939 \begin_layout Enumerate
9941 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9946 \begin_layout Enumerate
9948 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9949 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9953 \begin_layout Enumerate
9954 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9963 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9968 reset the counter for the label.
9972 \begin_layout Enumerate
9976 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9982 arg "depth-decrement"
9985 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9986 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9987 into the twofold-nested
9995 \begin_layout Enumerate
9996 The same thing happens if we do another
9999 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10005 arg "depth-decrement"
10008 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
10011 \begin_layout Standard
10012 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10017 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10028 The number of other
10032 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10039 The same rule applies for the
10043 environment, as well.
10046 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10047 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10050 \begin_layout Enumerate
10051 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10052 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10053 the same detail with how we did it.
10062 \begin_layout Standard
10070 arg "depth-increment"
10077 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10078 the example in parentheses someplace.
10079 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10080 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10081 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10085 \begin_layout Enumerate
10090 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10094 \begin_layout Verse
10095 Now we will add verse.
10096 \begin_inset Newline newline
10099 It will get much worse.
10100 \begin_inset Newline newline
10110 arg "depth-increment"
10120 \begin_layout Verse
10121 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10122 \begin_inset Newline newline
10125 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10126 \begin_inset Newline newline
10132 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10140 \begin_layout Verse
10141 Here comes a table:
10145 \begin_layout Standard
10146 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10152 \begin_layout Standard
10154 \begin_inset Tabular
10155 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10156 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10157 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10158 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10243 \begin_layout Verse
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10257 arg "depth-increment"
10263 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10269 \begin_inset Newline newline
10277 arg "depth-decrement"
10284 \begin_layout Enumerate
10289 : level #1) This is another item.
10290 Note that selecting a
10294 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10295 3 times to put the table inside the
10303 \begin_layout Quotation
10304 We're now ending the
10308 list and changing to
10313 We're still at level #1.
10314 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10315 The next set of paragraphs is a
10316 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10320 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10323 We will nest both the
10330 \begin_inset space ~
10335 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10339 for the letter body.
10343 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10346 to preserve the depth.
10347 Remember that you need to use
10350 arg "newline-insert newline"
10353 to create multiple lines inside the
10360 \begin_inset space ~
10370 \begin_layout Right Address
10372 \begin_inset Newline newline
10375 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10376 \begin_inset Newline newline
10382 \begin_layout Address
10384 \begin_inset space ~
10390 \begin_layout Quotation
10391 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10392 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10395 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10396 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10397 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10398 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10399 as soon as possible.
10400 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10403 \begin_layout Quotation
10404 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10405 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10406 with your order, along with payment.
10409 \begin_layout Quotation
10410 We thank you again for your patience.
10413 \begin_layout Address
10415 \begin_inset Newline newline
10422 \begin_layout Quotation
10423 That ends that example!
10426 \begin_layout Standard
10427 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10428 gives you a lot of power with just
10430 We could have easily nested an
10451 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10454 \begin_layout Subsection
10456 \begin_inset Index idx
10459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10460 Nesting ! Separation
10466 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10468 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10475 \begin_layout Standard
10476 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10478 For example you need two different enumerations:
10481 \begin_layout Enumerate
10486 \begin_layout Enumerate
10491 \begin_layout Enumerate
10495 \begin_layout Standard
10496 \begin_inset Separator plain
10502 \begin_layout Itemize
10508 \begin_layout Standard
10509 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10515 \begin_layout Enumerate
10519 \begin_layout Enumerate
10523 \begin_layout Enumerate
10527 \begin_layout Standard
10528 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10529 list item and use the menu
10531 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10532 Start New Environment
10535 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10536 ) and behind it the new list.
10539 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10540 Start New Parent Environment
10542 only appears if the item is nested.
10543 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10547 \begin_layout Standard
10548 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10549 (red arrow in LyX).
10550 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10551 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10554 \begin_layout Standard
10555 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10558 arg "paragraph-break"
10565 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10568 \begin_layout Section
10569 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10570 \begin_inset Index idx
10573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10582 \begin_layout Standard
10583 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10584 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10586 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10587 be broken at the end of a line.
10588 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10592 \begin_layout Subsection
10594 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10596 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10601 \begin_inset Index idx
10604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10613 \begin_layout Standard
10614 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10615 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10616 ) not to break the line at
10618 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10621 \begin_layout Quote
10622 Further documentation is given in section
10623 \begin_inset Newline newline
10627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10629 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10637 \begin_layout Standard
10638 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10647 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10651 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10653 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10662 A protected space is set with
10664 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10665 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10667 \begin_inset space ~
10675 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10681 \begin_layout Subsection
10683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10685 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10690 \begin_inset Index idx
10693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10694 Spacing ! Horizontal
10702 \begin_layout Standard
10703 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10705 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10706 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10710 The length units are listed in Appendix
10711 \begin_inset space ~
10715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10717 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10724 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10726 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10728 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10733 \begin_inset Index idx
10736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10737 Spaces ! Inter-word
10745 \begin_layout Standard
10746 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10747 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10748 at the ends of sentences.
10749 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10750 automatically takes care about this.
10751 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10752 followed by a period; see section
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10757 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10759 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10764 To insert a normal space, select
10766 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10767 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10769 \begin_inset space ~
10777 arg "space-insert normal"
10783 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10785 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10787 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10792 \begin_inset Index idx
10795 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10804 \begin_layout Standard
10806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10813 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10814 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10818 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10822 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10823 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10824 inside abbreviations:
10827 \begin_layout Quote
10829 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10833 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10836 \begin_layout Standard
10837 or between values and units.
10838 Compare for example this:
10839 \begin_inset Newline newline
10843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10847 \begin_inset Newline newline
10850 10 kg (normal space
10853 \begin_layout Standard
10854 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10856 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10857 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10859 \begin_inset space ~
10867 arg "space-insert thin"
10873 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10877 \begin_layout Standard
10878 You can also insert the following space types:
10881 \begin_layout Description
10883 \begin_inset space ~
10887 \begin_inset space ~
10890 space A line with a
10891 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10895 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10902 negative thin space between the arrows.
10905 \begin_layout Description
10907 \begin_inset space ~
10911 \begin_inset space ~
10914 space A line with a
10915 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10919 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10926 negative medium space between the arrows.
10929 \begin_layout Description
10931 \begin_inset space ~
10935 \begin_inset space ~
10938 space A line with a
10939 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10943 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10950 negative thick space between the arrows.
10953 \begin_layout Description
10955 \begin_inset space ~
10959 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10963 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10967 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10971 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10975 \begin_inset space ~
10979 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10982 em) space between the arrows.
10985 \begin_layout Description
10987 \begin_inset space ~
10991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10995 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10999 \begin_inset space \quad{}
11003 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11007 \begin_inset space ~
11011 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11014 em) space between the arrows.
11017 \begin_layout Description
11019 \begin_inset space ~
11023 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11027 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11031 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11035 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11039 \begin_inset space ~
11043 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11046 em) space between the arrows.
11049 \begin_layout Description
11051 \begin_inset space ~
11055 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11059 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11064 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11068 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11071 cm space between the arrows.
11074 \begin_layout Standard
11076 \begin_inset space ~
11080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11082 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11086 lists the different space sizes.
11089 \begin_layout Standard
11090 \begin_inset Float table
11095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11096 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11101 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11105 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11113 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11115 \begin_inset Tabular
11116 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11117 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11118 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11119 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11154 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11159 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11183 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11207 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11231 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11235 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11239 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11249 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11263 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11273 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11302 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11315 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11343 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11358 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11366 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11392 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11394 \begin_inset Index idx
11397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11406 \begin_layout Standard
11407 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11408 feature for adding extra space
11409 in a uniform fashion.
11410 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11411 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11412 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11413 equally between themselves.
11416 \begin_layout Standard
11417 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11420 \begin_layout Quote
11422 This is on the left side
11423 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 This is on the right
11429 \begin_layout Quote
11432 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11436 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11442 \begin_layout Quote
11445 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11449 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11453 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11459 \begin_layout Standard
11460 That was an example in the
11466 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11474 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11477 is one in a standard paragraph.
11478 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11482 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11485 \begin_layout Standard
11486 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11489 \begin_inset space ~
11494 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11497 \begin_layout Standard
11499 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11503 \begin_inset space ~
11509 \begin_layout Standard
11511 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11515 \begin_inset space ~
11521 \begin_layout Standard
11523 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11527 \begin_inset space ~
11533 \begin_layout Standard
11535 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11539 \begin_inset space ~
11545 \begin_layout Standard
11547 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11551 \begin_inset space ~
11557 \begin_layout Standard
11559 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11563 \begin_inset space ~
11569 \begin_layout Standard
11570 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11578 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11582 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11584 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11585 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11589 option in the space dialog.
11597 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11599 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11601 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11606 \begin_inset Index idx
11609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11618 \begin_layout Standard
11619 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11620 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11623 \begin_layout Standard
11624 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11627 What is correct English?:
11628 \begin_inset Newline newline
11632 \begin_inset Newline newline
11636 \begin_inset space ~
11639 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11640 \begin_inset Newline newline
11644 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11655 \begin_inset Newline newline
11659 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11670 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11676 \begin_layout Standard
11678 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11679 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11683 \begin_inset space ~
11687 \begin_inset space ~
11691 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11695 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11697 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11698 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11702 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset space ~
11712 \begin_inset space ~
11716 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11719 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11728 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11729 That is why it is named
11730 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11734 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11738 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11739 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11743 \begin_layout Subsection
11745 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11747 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11752 \begin_inset Index idx
11755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11764 \begin_layout Standard
11765 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11767 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11768 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11770 \begin_inset space ~
11776 There you find the following sizes:
11779 \begin_layout Standard
11792 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11793 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11798 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11800 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11801 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11803 \begin_inset space ~
11809 \begin_inset Index idx
11812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11813 Document ! Settings
11818 for the paragraph separation.
11819 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11830 \begin_layout Standard
11836 \begin_inset Index idx
11839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11845 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11846 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11851 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11852 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11861 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11870 s are described in section
11871 \begin_inset space ~
11875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11877 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11886 If there are several
11890 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11891 You can therefore use
11895 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11898 \begin_layout Standard
11903 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11904 \begin_inset space ~
11908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11910 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11917 \begin_layout Standard
11918 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11928 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11929 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11941 \begin_layout Subsection
11942 Paragraph Alignment
11943 \begin_inset Index idx
11946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11947 Paragraph ! Alignment
11955 \begin_layout Standard
11956 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11958 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11961 dialog (toolbar button
11964 arg "layout-paragraph"
11968 There are five possibilities:
11971 \begin_layout Itemize
11979 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11985 \begin_layout Itemize
11993 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11999 \begin_layout Itemize
12007 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
12013 \begin_layout Itemize
12021 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12027 \begin_layout Itemize
12035 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12041 \begin_layout Standard
12042 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12043 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12044 the left and right margins.
12045 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12048 \begin_layout Standard
12050 This paragraph is right aligned,
12053 \begin_layout Standard
12055 this one is centered,
12058 \begin_layout Standard
12060 this one is left aligned.
12063 \begin_layout Subsection
12065 \begin_inset Index idx
12068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12069 Page breaks ! Forced
12075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12077 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12084 \begin_layout Standard
12085 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12086 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12087 force a page break where you want one.
12088 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12089 is good at page breaking.
12090 Only if you use a lot of
12094 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12095 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12098 \begin_layout Standard
12099 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12100 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12104 have to change the page breaking.
12107 \begin_layout Standard
12108 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12110 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12112 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12113 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12115 \begin_inset space ~
12121 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12123 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12124 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12126 \begin_inset space ~
12131 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12133 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12134 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12137 \begin_layout Standard
12138 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12139 at the top of a page.
12140 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12142 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12143 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12144 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12146 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12148 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12152 to learn more about
12159 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12161 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12163 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12168 \begin_inset Index idx
12171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12172 Page breaks ! Clear
12180 \begin_layout Standard
12181 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12182 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12183 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12184 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12185 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12188 \begin_layout Standard
12189 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12191 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12192 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12194 \begin_inset space ~
12200 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12202 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12203 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12205 \begin_inset space ~
12209 \begin_inset space ~
12214 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12215 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12218 \begin_layout Subsection
12220 \begin_inset Index idx
12223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12232 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12239 \begin_layout Standard
12240 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12242 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12244 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12245 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12247 \begin_inset space ~
12251 \begin_inset space ~
12259 arg "newline-insert newline"
12263 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12265 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12266 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12268 \begin_inset space ~
12272 \begin_inset space ~
12280 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12283 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12285 This is useful to avoid
12286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12293 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12296 \begin_layout Standard
12297 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12298 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12300 very good at line breaking.
12301 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12302 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12303 \begin_inset space ~
12307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12309 reference "sec:Quote"
12314 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12316 reference "sec:Verse"
12321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12323 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12330 \begin_layout Subsection
12332 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12334 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12339 \begin_inset Index idx
12342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12351 \begin_layout Standard
12353 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12364 \begin_layout Standard
12368 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12369 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12371 \begin_inset space ~
12376 you can insert horizontal lines.
12377 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12378 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12379 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12382 \begin_layout Standard
12384 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12395 \begin_layout Section
12396 Characters and Symbols
12399 \begin_layout Standard
12400 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12401 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12402 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12410 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12414 for information on how this is done.
12417 \begin_layout Standard
12418 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12423 dialog via the menu
12425 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12426 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12432 \begin_layout Standard
12433 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12436 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12441 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12442 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12444 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12452 \begin_layout Section
12453 Fonts and Text Styles
12454 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12456 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12463 \begin_layout Subsection
12465 \begin_inset Index idx
12468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12477 \begin_layout Standard
12478 There are two types of fonts:
12481 \begin_layout Description
12483 \begin_inset space ~
12487 \begin_inset Index idx
12490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12496 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12497 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12501 characters) in the font.
12502 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12503 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12504 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12505 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12506 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12507 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12508 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12509 \begin_inset Newline newline
12512 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12513 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12514 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12515 sizes than at small ones.
12516 \begin_inset Newline newline
12530 \begin_inset space ~
12538 \begin_layout Description
12540 \begin_inset space ~
12544 \begin_inset Index idx
12547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12553 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12554 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12555 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12556 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12557 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12558 image manipulation program.
12559 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12560 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12561 \begin_inset space ~
12564 pixels high up to 34
12565 \begin_inset space ~
12568 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12569 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12570 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12572 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12573 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12574 \begin_inset Newline newline
12577 Bitmap fonts are named
12580 \begin_inset space ~
12585 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12588 \begin_layout Standard
12589 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12590 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12591 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12592 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12593 use scalable fonts.
12596 \begin_layout Standard
12597 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12600 \begin_layout Standard
12601 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12602 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12603 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12604 font to emphasize text, you use an
12605 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12609 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12613 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12615 In \SpecialChar LyX
12616 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12620 \begin_layout Subsection
12623 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12625 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12632 \begin_layout Standard
12633 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12634 used its own fonts.
12635 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12636 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12639 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12640 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12641 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12642 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12643 to a word processor.
12644 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12645 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12646 files are very portable across
12647 different machines.
12648 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12649 has increased a lot
12650 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12653 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12655 \begin_inset space ~
12659 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12661 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12666 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12667 code in the document
12668 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12671 \begin_layout Standard
12672 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12673 engines that are also able directly
12674 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12676 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12678 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12680 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12681 that is installed on your system.
12682 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12685 \begin_layout Standard
12686 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12694 In practice, some fonts might fail due to a legacy (non Unicode) font encoding,
12695 bad metrics, or other font deficiencies; so you might have to experiment.
12703 \begin_layout Subsection
12704 Document Font and Font size
12705 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12707 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12712 \begin_inset Index idx
12715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12722 \begin_inset Index idx
12725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12734 \begin_layout Standard
12735 You can set the document fonts in the
12737 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12741 \begin_inset Index idx
12744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12745 Document ! Settings
12755 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12756 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12759 \begin_inset space ~
12768 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12770 \begin_inset space ~
12773 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12776 \begin_layout Standard
12781 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12782 This requires that you use
12794 as the output format, i.
12795 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12799 \begin_inset space \space{}
12802 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12803 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12804 installed (see section
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12809 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12811 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12816 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12818 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12819 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12821 \begin_inset space ~
12824 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12825 cannot determine the family.
12826 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12827 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12830 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12833 \begin_layout Standard
12834 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12835 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12840 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12846 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12847 With LyX's default font encoding, this is a look-alike of the standard
12850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12856 \begin_inset space ~
12862 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12882 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12887 European Computer Modern
12890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12898 However, some classes set different default fonts.
12901 \begin_layout Standard
12906 is a bitmap font, it looks pixelated in PDF output, especially when you
12907 read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12912 This problem is less severe if you read PDFs in
12915 \begin_inset space ~
12920 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12926 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12927 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12930 \begin_layout Itemize
12934 \begin_inset space ~
12939 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12952 \begin_inset space ~
12957 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12958 community in order to replace
12962 as the default font.
12963 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12964 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12981 One difference is improved kerning.
12989 \begin_layout Itemize
12990 If you do not like the look of
12998 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
12999 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13003 \begin_inset space ~
13009 \begin_inset space ~
13019 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13020 \begin_inset space ~
13023 serif and typewriter fonts,
13027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13028 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13029 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13035 \begin_inset space ~
13044 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13045 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13049 \begin_inset space \space{}
13057 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13061 \begin_inset space \space{}
13067 \begin_inset space ~
13075 \begin_inset space ~
13085 but you can also select your own.
13086 \begin_inset Newline newline
13089 The differences between roman,
13092 \begin_inset space ~
13101 fonts are explained in section
13102 \begin_inset space ~
13106 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13108 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13113 \begin_inset Newline newline
13119 \begin_inset space ~
13124 was originally designed for newspapers.
13125 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13126 into the small newspaper columns.
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13135 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13138 \begin_layout Standard
13139 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13152 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13157 depends on the class you are using.
13158 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13161 \begin_layout Standard
13162 Note that the font size is the
13167 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13168 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13169 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13170 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13173 \begin_inset space ~
13179 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13180 \begin_inset space ~
13184 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13186 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13193 \begin_layout Standard
13197 \begin_inset space ~
13202 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13204 \begin_inset space ~
13207 serif or typewriter.
13212 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13222 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13225 \begin_layout Standard
13230 LaTeX font encoding
13232 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13239 \begin_inset Index idx
13242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13250 \begin_inset space ~
13254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13256 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13261 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13262 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13269 \begin_layout Standard
13270 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13272 Use Old Style Figures
13276 Use True Small Caps
13279 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13282 Use Old Style Figures
13284 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13286 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13287 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13291 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13294 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13298 Use True Small Caps
13300 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13301 of scaled capitals.
13302 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13303 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13306 \begin_layout Standard
13311 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13312 a font to display the script characters.
13316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13317 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13323 \begin_inset Index idx
13326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13333 So this has no effect for the document language
13347 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13351 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13359 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13364 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13365 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13367 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13369 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13372 dialog, see section
13373 \begin_inset space ~
13377 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13379 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13391 \begin_layout Subsection
13395 \begin_layout Standard
13396 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13397 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13399 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13400 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13401 choose a math font in the dialog
13403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13407 \begin_inset Index idx
13410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13411 Document ! Settings
13417 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13418 automatically selects a math font.
13419 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13420 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13429 \begin_inset space ~
13435 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13440 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13441 document font is available.
13444 \begin_layout Standard
13445 Note that the math font will not be used for
13449 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13455 or by the insertion of the command
13462 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13463 \begin_inset space ~
13467 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13468 while the math characters do not.
13470 \begin_inset space ~
13473 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13476 \begin_inset space ~
13484 \begin_inset space ~
13489 in the document font settings.
13492 \begin_layout Standard
13493 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13494 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13495 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13496 font (in most cases
13497 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13503 \begin_inset space ~
13509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13512 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13513 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13515 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13521 \begin_inset space ~
13527 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13533 \begin_layout Subsection
13534 Using Different Character Styles
13535 \begin_inset Index idx
13538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13545 \begin_inset Index idx
13548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13557 \begin_layout Standard
13558 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13559 automatically changes the character style for certain
13560 paragraph environments.
13562 supports two character styles,
13571 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13575 \begin_layout Standard
13580 style, do one of the following:
13583 \begin_layout Itemize
13584 click on the toolbar button
13593 \begin_layout Itemize
13594 use the key binding
13603 \begin_layout Standard
13604 These commands are all toggles.
13609 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13612 \begin_layout Standard
13613 One typically uses the
13617 style for proper names.
13619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13626 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13628 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13634 \begin_layout Standard
13635 A more widely used character style is the
13640 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13647 \begin_layout Itemize
13648 clicking on the toolbar button
13657 \begin_layout Itemize
13658 using the keybindings
13667 \begin_layout Standard
13672 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13674 use a different font.
13677 \begin_layout Standard
13678 We've been using the
13682 style all over the place in this document.
13683 Here's one more example:
13686 \begin_layout Quotation
13689 Do not overuse character styles!
13692 \begin_layout Standard
13693 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13694 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13695 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13696 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13700 \begin_layout Standard
13701 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13709 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13711 \begin_inset space ~
13714 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13720 arg "dialog-show character"
13726 \begin_layout Subsection
13727 Fine-Tuning with the
13732 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13734 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13739 \begin_inset Index idx
13742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13751 \begin_layout Standard
13752 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13754 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13755 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13756 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13757 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13758 from ordinary dialog.
13761 \begin_layout Standard
13762 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13763 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13764 \begin_inset Newline newline
13767 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13768 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13771 \begin_layout Standard
13772 To use custom character styles, open the
13774 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13776 \begin_inset space ~
13779 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13782 dialog or press the toolbar button
13785 arg "dialog-show character"
13789 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13790 font property that you can choose.
13791 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13794 \begin_inset space ~
13799 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13804 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13805 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13806 environments all at once.
13809 \begin_layout Standard
13810 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13813 \begin_inset space ~
13825 \begin_layout Labeling
13826 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13836 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13840 The possible options are:
13844 \begin_layout Labeling
13845 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13850 This is the Roman font family.
13851 Normally a serif font.
13852 It's also the default family.
13862 \begin_layout Labeling
13863 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13867 \begin_inset space ~
13874 This is the Sans Serif font family.
13886 \begin_layout Labeling
13887 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13894 This is the Typewriter font family.
13900 arg "font-typewriter"
13909 \begin_layout Labeling
13910 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13915 This corresponds to the print weight.
13920 \begin_layout Labeling
13921 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13926 This is the Medium font series.
13927 It's also the default series.
13930 \begin_layout Labeling
13931 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13938 This is the Bold font series.
13951 \begin_layout Labeling
13952 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13957 As the name implies.
13962 \begin_layout Labeling
13963 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13968 This is the Upright font shape.
13969 It's also the default shape.
13972 \begin_layout Labeling
13973 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13987 s the Italic font shape
13993 \begin_layout Labeling
13994 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14001 This is the Slanted font shape
14003 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14004 , this is different from italic).
14007 \begin_layout Labeling
14008 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14012 \begin_inset space ~
14019 This is the Small caps font shape
14026 \begin_layout Labeling
14027 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14032 Alters the text color.
14033 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14037 \begin_inset space ~
14042 , which means that the document default color set in
14044 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14045 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14051 \begin_inset space ~
14056 is used, you can choose between
14133 \begin_inset Index idx
14136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14145 \begin_layout Labeling
14146 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14151 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14152 the language of the document.
14153 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14154 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14156 \begin_inset Newline newline
14159 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14161 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14162 When using the spell checking (see section
14163 \begin_inset space ~
14167 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14169 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14173 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14176 \begin_layout Labeling
14177 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14182 Alters the size of the font.
14183 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14184 proportional to the document font size.
14185 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14186 the details, but a general description of what
14192 \begin_layout Labeling
14193 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14201 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14205 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14214 arg "font-size tiny"
14220 \begin_layout Labeling
14221 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14229 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14233 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14242 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14248 \begin_layout Labeling
14249 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14257 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14261 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14270 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14276 \begin_layout Labeling
14277 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14285 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14289 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14298 arg "font-size small"
14304 \begin_layout Labeling
14305 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14319 It's also the default size.
14323 arg "font-size normal"
14329 \begin_layout Labeling
14330 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14351 arg "font-size large"
14357 \begin_layout Labeling
14358 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14379 arg "font-size larger"
14385 \begin_layout Labeling
14386 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14394 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14398 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14407 arg "font-size largest"
14413 \begin_layout Labeling
14414 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14422 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14426 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14435 arg "font-size huge"
14441 \begin_layout Labeling
14442 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14450 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14454 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14463 arg "font-size giant"
14469 \begin_layout Labeling
14470 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14475 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14495 arg "font-size increase"
14501 \begin_layout Labeling
14502 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14507 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14508 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14516 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14527 arg "font-size decrease"
14534 \begin_layout Standard
14539 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14540 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14542 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14543 — use those instead.
14544 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14547 \begin_layout Labeling
14548 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14553 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14558 \begin_layout Labeling
14559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14566 This is text with emphasize on
14569 This might seem like the same as
14573 , but it is actually a bit different.
14579 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14581 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14584 \begin_layout Labeling
14585 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14592 This is text with Underbar on.
14598 arg "font-underline"
14604 \begin_inset Newline newline
14609 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14610 when you could not change fonts.
14611 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14612 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14613 because some people
14617 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14620 \begin_layout Labeling
14621 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14625 \begin_inset space ~
14632 This is text with Double underbar on.
14638 arg "font-underunderline"
14642 \begin_inset Newline newline
14645 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14646 about double underbar.
14649 \begin_layout Labeling
14650 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14654 \begin_inset space ~
14661 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14667 arg "font-underwave"
14671 \begin_inset Newline newline
14674 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14675 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14678 \begin_layout Labeling
14679 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14686 This is text with Strikeout on.
14692 arg "font-strikeout"
14696 \begin_inset Newline newline
14699 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14700 changed in the meantime.
14703 \begin_layout Labeling
14704 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14711 This is text with Noun on.
14718 , this is a logical attribute.
14719 Normally it's equivalent to
14722 \begin_inset space ~
14731 \begin_layout Standard
14732 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14733 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14735 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14737 \begin_inset space ~
14740 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14746 arg "dialog-show character"
14749 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14750 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14753 arg "textstyle-apply"
14757 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14761 \begin_layout Standard
14762 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14769 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14770 (suppose you just set the shape to
14771 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14775 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14783 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14789 \begin_inset space ~
14801 \begin_layout Standard
14802 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14810 \begin_inset space ~
14822 \begin_layout Itemize
14828 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14832 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14835 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14836 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14844 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14848 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14853 \begin_inset Newline newline
14857 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14871 \begin_inset Note Note
14874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14875 For more on phantoms see section
14876 \begin_inset space ~
14880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14882 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
14892 \begin_inset Newline newline
14898 \begin_layout Itemize
14903 fonts use characters with serifs.
14904 These are the small
14905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14912 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
14913 The following example shows the difference:
14914 \begin_inset Newline newline
14918 \begin_inset Newline newline
14923 text without serifs
14926 \begin_inset Newline newline
14929 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
14930 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
14937 \begin_layout Itemize
14942 is not recommended for use as a base type.
14943 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
14944 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
14947 \begin_layout Standard
14948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14952 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14955 refers to applying or removing font properties.
14956 When a property is marked for toggling in the
14959 \begin_inset space ~
14964 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
14965 the property to be removed.
14966 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
14967 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
14968 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14986 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
14987 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
14988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14995 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
14999 \begin_inset space ~
15004 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15007 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15011 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15015 If you, for example, set
15016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15020 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15024 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15028 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15034 \begin_inset space ~
15039 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15041 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15048 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15051 \begin_layout Standard
15052 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15053 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15056 \begin_layout Section
15057 Printing and Previewing
15060 \begin_layout Subsection
15064 \begin_layout Standard
15065 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15066 using \SpecialChar LyX
15067 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15068 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15069 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15070 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15072 Additional Features
15077 \begin_layout Standard
15079 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15082 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15083 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15084 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15087 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15088 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15089 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15090 to turn your writing into printable output.
15091 This happens in two stages:
15094 \begin_layout Enumerate
15095 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15096 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15098 a file with the extension,
15099 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15107 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15113 \begin_layout Enumerate
15114 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15115 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15116 to use the commands in the
15120 file to produce printable output.
15123 \begin_layout Subsection
15124 Output file formats
15125 \begin_inset Index idx
15128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15135 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15137 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15144 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15145 Simple text (ASCII)
15146 \begin_inset Index idx
15149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15150 File formats ! ASCII
15158 \begin_layout Standard
15159 This file type has the extension
15160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15168 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15172 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15173 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15176 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15177 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15183 \begin_layout Standard
15184 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15186 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15187 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15189 \begin_inset space ~
15195 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15196 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15197 bibliography (section
15198 \begin_inset space ~
15202 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15204 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15209 If your document includes such material, use
15211 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15212 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15214 \begin_inset space ~
15218 \begin_inset space ~
15222 \begin_inset space ~
15230 \begin_inset space ~
15234 \begin_inset space ~
15240 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15241 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15244 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15247 \begin_inset Index idx
15250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15251 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15260 \begin_layout Standard
15261 This file type has the extension
15262 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15270 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15273 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15276 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15277 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15278 -Errors or to process it manually
15279 with console commands.
15280 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15281 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15282 's temporary directory whenever you
15283 view or export your document.
15286 \begin_layout Standard
15287 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15288 -file using the menu
15290 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15291 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15295 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15296 export variants are explained in section
15297 \begin_inset space ~
15301 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15303 reference "subsec:Export"
15310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15312 \begin_inset Index idx
15315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15324 \begin_layout Standard
15325 This file type has the extension
15326 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15346 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15347 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15348 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15352 \begin_layout Standard
15353 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15354 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15355 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15356 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15357 when you view the DVI.
15358 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15361 \begin_layout Standard
15362 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15364 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15365 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15370 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15371 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15373 \begin_inset space ~
15379 The latter option uses the program
15381 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15387 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15390 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15391 font access (see section
15392 \begin_inset space ~
15396 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15398 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15403 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15404 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15409 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15411 \begin_inset Index idx
15414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15415 File formats ! PostScript
15423 \begin_layout Standard
15424 This file type has the extension
15425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15437 PostScript was developed by the company
15441 as a printer language.
15442 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15444 PostScript can be seen as a
15445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15448 programming language
15449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15452 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15457 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15464 \begin_inset Index idx
15467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15469 packages ! pstricks
15479 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15482 \begin_layout Standard
15483 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15487 Encapsulated PostScript
15488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15491 (EPS, file extension
15492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15504 As \SpecialChar LyX
15505 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15506 convert them in the background to EPS.
15507 If, for example, you have 50
15508 \begin_inset space ~
15511 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15513 \begin_inset space ~
15516 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15517 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15519 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15520 EPS to avoid this problem.
15523 \begin_layout Standard
15524 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15526 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15527 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15533 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15535 \begin_inset Index idx
15538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15545 \begin_inset Index idx
15548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15557 \begin_layout Standard
15558 This file type has the extension
15559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15575 Portable Document Format
15576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15583 was derived from PostScript.
15584 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15586 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15590 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15593 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15594 looks exactly the same.
15597 \begin_layout Standard
15598 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15602 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15606 (JPG, file extension
15607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15634 Portable Network Graphics
15635 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15638 (PNG, file extension
15639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15651 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15652 converts them in the
15653 background to one of these formats.
15654 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15655 will slow down your workflow.
15656 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15659 \begin_layout Standard
15660 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15662 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15668 \begin_layout Description
15670 \begin_inset space ~
15673 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15677 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15680 \begin_layout Description
15682 \begin_inset space ~
15689 ) This uses the program
15691 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15694 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15697 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15700 is a new engine, derived from
15704 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15705 access (see section
15706 \begin_inset space ~
15710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15712 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15717 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15718 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15723 \begin_layout Description
15725 \begin_inset space ~
15732 ) This uses the program
15737 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15743 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15744 font access (see section
15745 \begin_inset space ~
15749 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15751 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15756 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15757 vertically written Japanese.
15760 \begin_layout Description
15762 \begin_inset space ~
15765 (cropped) This is the same as
15768 \begin_inset space ~
15773 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15774 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15775 to generate good-looking
15776 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15779 \begin_layout Description
15781 \begin_inset space ~
15784 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15788 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15792 \begin_layout Description
15794 \begin_inset space ~
15797 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15801 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15802 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15806 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15807 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15810 \begin_layout Standard
15814 \begin_inset space ~
15823 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15824 works without problems.
15825 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15826 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15830 \begin_inset space ~
15838 \begin_inset space ~
15843 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15853 \begin_inset Index idx
15856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15857 FileFormats ! XHTML
15863 \begin_inset Index idx
15866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15875 \begin_layout Standard
15876 This file type has the extension
15877 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15885 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15889 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
15890 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
15891 When \SpecialChar LyX
15892 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
15893 suitable for the purpose.
15894 For the math output you can choose in the menu
15896 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
15897 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
15900 between different formats, which are described in section
15902 Math Output in XHTML
15907 \begin_inset space ~
15915 \begin_layout Standard
15916 XHTML output remains
15917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15924 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
15925 features are supported yet.
15929 and the World Wide Web
15933 Additional Features
15935 manual, for more information.
15938 \begin_layout Standard
15939 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
15941 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15942 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15948 \begin_layout Subsection
15950 \begin_inset Index idx
15953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15962 \begin_layout Standard
15963 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
15964 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
15973 or use the toolbar button
15980 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
15981 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
15982 \begin_inset space ~
15986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15988 reference "sec:File-Formats"
15992 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
15994 \begin_inset space ~
15998 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16000 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16005 Further output formats can be selected via
16007 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16008 View (Other Formats)
16010 or the toolbar button
16019 \begin_layout Standard
16020 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16021 viewer window using the menu
16023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16028 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16029 Update (Other Formats)
16034 \begin_layout Standard
16035 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16038 To have a real output, export your document.
16041 \begin_layout Section
16042 A few Words about Typography
16043 \begin_inset Index idx
16046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16055 \begin_layout Subsection
16056 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16057 \begin_inset Index idx
16060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16067 \begin_inset Index idx
16070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16079 \begin_layout Standard
16080 In \SpecialChar LyX
16082 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16093 symbol comes in four variants: the
16110 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16116 \begin_layout Standard
16117 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16127 height_special "totalheight"
16132 backgroundcolor "none"
16135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16136 \begin_inset Tabular
16137 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16138 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16139 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
16140 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16141 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16142 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16143 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16171 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16172 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16181 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16184 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16190 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16193 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16211 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16212 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16230 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16234 system key combination
16238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16239 On Mac and Linux, the en dash is entered with
16242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16251 and the em dash with
16254 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16258 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16267 is the Mac label for the right
16276 Alternatively, dashes can be inserted with
16278 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16280 \begin_inset space ~
16283 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16291 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16295 function with the Unicode code point as argument (2013 for the em dash
16296 and 2014 for the en dash).
16302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16315 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16316 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16338 system key combination or
16339 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16343 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16353 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16366 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16378 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16386 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16405 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16411 \begin_layout Standard
16412 Dashes can also be inserted with
16414 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16416 \begin_inset space ~
16419 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16427 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16434 \begin_layout Standard
16435 Hyphen and dashes are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in math
16436 mode and has a length of its own.
16437 Here are some examples:
16440 \begin_layout Enumerate
16441 line- and page-breaks
16442 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16452 \begin_layout Enumerate
16454 \begin_inset space ~
16458 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16468 \begin_layout Enumerate
16469 The em dash is used without spaces: Oh—there's a dash.
16470 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16480 \begin_layout Enumerate
16481 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16485 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16495 \begin_layout Standard
16497 \begin_inset CommandInset href
16499 name "Wikipedia entry on dashes"
16500 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Dash"
16508 \begin_layout Subsection
16509 Dashes and line breaks
16510 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16512 name "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
16519 \begin_layout Standard
16520 Whether line breaks around dashes are allowed depends on the use case and
16524 \begin_layout Itemize
16525 No line breaks are allowed in ranges of values like A–Z or 1975–1982.
16528 \begin_layout Itemize
16529 In English, dashes used to set off parenthetical statements should not start
16533 \begin_layout Itemize
16534 In French and Spanish, dashes around parenthetical statements are treated
16535 similar to brackets: line breaks are not allowed on the inner side.
16538 \begin_layout Standard
16539 When using spaced en dashes
16540 \begin_inset space ~
16543 - common in British English
16544 \begin_inset space ~
16547 - line breaks before the dash can be prevented with protected spaces.
16550 \begin_layout Standard
16551 When using em dashes without spaces—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16552 common in American English—\SpecialChar allowbreak
16554 optional line breaks with the menu
16556 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16557 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16558 Optional line break
16563 \begin_layout Standard
16564 For documents containing many em dashes, you may consider to select the
16567 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16568 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16569 Fonts\SpecialChar menuseparator
16570 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures.
16573 This forces the output of dashes as
16574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16578 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16582 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16586 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16589 when exporting to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16591 The \SpecialChar TeX
16592 font ligature mechanism converts them to dash characters followed
16593 by an optional line break.
16596 \begin_layout Standard
16600 \begin_layout Enumerate
16601 This results in optional line breaks after
16606 Incorrect line breaks must be prevented by wrapping in a makebox
16610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16613 Prevent Hyphenation
16618 \begin_inset space ~
16634 in \SpecialChar TeX
16640 \begin_layout Itemize
16642 \begin_inset space ~
16646 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16656 height_special "totalheight"
16661 backgroundcolor "none"
16664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16673 \begin_layout Itemize
16677 \begin_inset Box Frameless
16687 height_special "totalheight"
16692 backgroundcolor "none"
16695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16699 \begin_inset space ~
16707 si tout le monde ne les aime pas
16708 \begin_inset space ~
16711 – sont très utiles.
16714 \begin_layout Itemize
16721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16730 —un inciso con rayas— se escribe así.
16733 \begin_layout Standard
16734 An incorrect line break is easily overlooked because
16735 \begin_inset space ~
16738 – in contrast to an overfull line
16739 \begin_inset space ~
16742 – it does not trigger a warning in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16747 \begin_layout Enumerate
16748 The setting is ignored for documents using non-\SpecialChar TeX
16753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16759 XeTeXdashbreakstate
16762 The default causes dashes to behave like ligature dashes.
16763 The usual behaviour of literal dashes can be achieved by inserting
16768 XeTeXdashbreakstate=0
16771 into the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16780 \begin_layout Enumerate
16796 \begin_layout Enumerate
16797 Hyphenation is suppressed in words adjacent to hyphens and ligature dashes.
16800 \begin_layout Standard
16801 Since \SpecialChar LyX
16803 \begin_inset space ~
16806 2.2, -- and --- are exported to LaTeX as -{}- and -{}-{}- to prevent ligation
16811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16812 Up to \SpecialChar LyX
16814 \begin_inset space ~
16817 2.1, -- and --- was output unchanged which led to different look in \SpecialChar LyX
16819 export, HTML export and the PDF export.
16824 Occurrences in older documents are converted to literal Unicode dashes.
16825 This led to different line breaks in some documents.
16828 \begin_inset space ~
16831 2.3 provides the option
16833 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16842 It is on by default but unselected when opening documents edited with \SpecialChar LyX
16844 \begin_inset space ~
16848 \begin_inset Newline newline
16851 Note the following side-effects of the changes in \SpecialChar LyX
16855 \begin_layout Itemize
16856 If you used literal em- and en dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16858 \begin_inset space ~
16861 2.2 documents, you must manually unselect
16863 Output en- and em-dashes as ligatures
16865 to ensure unchanged behavior.
16869 \begin_layout Itemize
16870 If you used both, literal and ligature dashes in pre-\SpecialChar LyX
16872 \begin_inset space ~
16875 2.2 documents, you may need to enable or prevent individual line breaks as
16876 shown above to restore the correct line breaking behaviour.
16879 \begin_layout Itemize
16880 Zero-width space (ZWSP) characters in older \SpecialChar LyX
16881 documents that follow literal
16882 em- and en-dashes are removed during the conversion to the format of \SpecialChar LyX
16884 \begin_inset space ~
16888 If you used them as optional line breaks after dashes, convert them to
16889 space insets before opening your document with \SpecialChar LyX
16891 \begin_inset space ~
16894 2.3 or the optional line breaks will be lost.
16897 \begin_layout Subsection
16899 \begin_inset Index idx
16902 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16909 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16911 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16918 \begin_layout Standard
16919 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16920 but automatically in the output.
16921 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16927 \begin_inset Index idx
16930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16937 following the rules of the document language.
16940 \begin_layout Standard
16942 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16946 font and with unusual constructs, like
16947 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16951 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16955 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16956 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16957 This is done with the menu
16959 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16960 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16962 \begin_inset space ~
16968 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16970 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16974 \begin_layout Standard
16975 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16976 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16978 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16982 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16987 would then see the hyphen
16988 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16992 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16995 as a hyphenation possibility.
16996 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16997 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can use a protected
17000 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17001 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
17004 ) or put it into a makebox as described in section
17006 Prevent Hyphenation
17011 \begin_inset space ~
17019 \begin_layout Subsection
17021 \begin_inset Index idx
17024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17033 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17034 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
17035 \begin_inset CommandInset label
17037 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
17044 \begin_layout Standard
17045 When \SpecialChar LyX
17046 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
17047 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
17049 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
17052 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17055 appropriate amount of space.
17056 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17059 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
17061 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
17062 gets after another word.
17065 \begin_layout Standard
17066 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
17067 not work in all cases.
17069 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17077 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17080 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
17081 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
17084 \begin_layout Standard
17085 Here are some examples of
17089 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
17092 \begin_layout Itemize
17097 \begin_layout Itemize
17102 \begin_layout Standard
17103 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
17106 \begin_layout Itemize
17108 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17112 this is too much space!
17115 \begin_layout Itemize
17120 \begin_layout Standard
17121 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
17124 \begin_layout Standard
17125 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
17128 \begin_layout Enumerate
17132 \begin_inset space ~
17137 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
17138 \begin_inset space ~
17142 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17144 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
17149 \begin_inset Index idx
17152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17153 Spaces ! inter-word
17161 \begin_layout Enumerate
17165 \begin_inset space ~
17170 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
17171 \begin_inset space ~
17175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
17177 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
17182 \begin_inset Index idx
17185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17194 \begin_layout Enumerate
17198 \begin_inset space ~
17202 \begin_inset space ~
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17213 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
17215 \begin_inset space ~
17220 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
17221 This function is also bound to
17224 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
17230 \begin_layout Standard
17231 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
17234 \begin_layout Itemize
17236 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17240 \begin_inset space \space{}
17243 this is too much space!
17246 \begin_layout Itemize
17247 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
17251 \begin_layout Standard
17252 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
17253 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
17255 will take care of this.
17258 \begin_layout Standard
17259 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
17263 \begin_inset space ~
17269 feature described in the section
17271 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
17276 Additional Features
17281 \begin_layout Subsubsection
17283 \begin_inset Index idx
17286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17287 Typography ! Quotation marks
17293 \begin_inset Index idx
17296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17297 Quotation marks | see
17301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17327 \begin_layout Standard
17329 usually sets quotation marks correctly.
17330 Specifically, it will insert an opening mark at the beginning of quoted
17331 text, and use a closing mark at the end.
17333 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17337 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17341 The keyboard character,
17345 , generates this automatically.
17348 \begin_layout Standard
17349 You can specify what character the
17353 key produces by using the submenu
17359 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17363 \begin_inset Index idx
17366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17367 Document ! Settings
17372 dialog and switching the
17376 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17377 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language).
17379 \begin_inset space ~
17385 \begin_layout Labeling
17386 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17390 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17394 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17398 \begin_inset space ~
17402 \begin_inset space ~
17406 \begin_inset Quotes els
17410 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17416 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17420 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17424 \begin_inset Quotes els
17428 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17431 quotation marks (as common, e.
17432 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17438 \begin_layout Labeling
17439 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17442 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17446 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17450 \begin_inset space ~
17454 \begin_inset space ~
17458 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17462 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17468 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17472 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17476 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17480 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17483 quotation marks (as common, e.
17484 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17490 \begin_layout Labeling
17491 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17494 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17498 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17502 \begin_inset space ~
17506 \begin_inset space ~
17510 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17514 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17520 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17524 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17528 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17532 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17535 quotation marks (as common, e.
17536 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17542 \begin_layout Labeling
17543 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17546 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17550 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17554 \begin_inset space ~
17558 \begin_inset space ~
17562 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17566 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17572 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17576 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17580 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17584 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17587 quotation marks (as common, e.
17588 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17594 \begin_layout Labeling
17595 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17598 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17602 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17606 \begin_inset space ~
17610 \begin_inset space ~
17614 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17618 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17624 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17628 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17632 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17636 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17639 quotation marks (as common, e.
17640 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17643 g., in Switzerland)
17646 \begin_layout Labeling
17647 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17650 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17654 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17658 \begin_inset space ~
17662 \begin_inset space ~
17666 \begin_inset Quotes als
17670 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17676 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17680 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17684 \begin_inset Quotes als
17688 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17691 quotation marks (as common, e.
17692 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17698 \begin_layout Labeling
17699 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17702 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17706 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17710 \begin_inset space ~
17714 \begin_inset space ~
17718 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17722 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17728 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17732 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17736 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17740 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17743 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17746 \begin_layout Labeling
17747 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17750 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17754 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17758 \begin_inset space ~
17762 \begin_inset space ~
17766 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17770 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17776 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17780 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17784 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17788 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17791 quotation marks (as common, e.
17792 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17795 g., in Great Britain)
17798 \begin_layout Labeling
17799 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17802 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17806 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17810 \begin_inset space ~
17814 \begin_inset space ~
17818 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17822 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17828 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17832 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17836 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17840 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17843 quotation marks (as common, e.
17844 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17850 \begin_layout Labeling
17851 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17854 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17858 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17862 \begin_inset space ~
17866 \begin_inset space ~
17870 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17874 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17880 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17884 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17888 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17892 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17895 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17899 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17900 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17901 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17902 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17903 the inner marks differ).
17911 \begin_layout Labeling
17912 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17915 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17919 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17923 \begin_inset space ~
17927 \begin_inset space ~
17931 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17935 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17941 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17945 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17949 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17953 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17956 quotation marks (as common, e.
17957 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17963 \begin_layout Labeling
17964 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17967 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17971 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17975 \begin_inset space ~
17979 \begin_inset space ~
17983 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17987 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17993 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17997 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
18001 \begin_inset Quotes wls
18005 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
18008 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
18011 \begin_layout Labeling
18012 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18013 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18021 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18027 \begin_inset space ~
18031 \begin_inset space ~
18037 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18045 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18049 \begin_inset Quotes jld
18053 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
18057 \begin_inset Quotes jls
18061 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
18064 quotation marks (as common, e.
18065 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18073 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18074 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18082 \begin_layout Labeling
18083 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
18084 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18092 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18098 \begin_inset space ~
18102 \begin_inset space ~
18108 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18116 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18120 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18124 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18128 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18132 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18135 quotation marks (as common, e.
18136 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18139 g., in North Korea and China)
18143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18144 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18145 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18153 \begin_layout Standard
18154 Inner quotation marks
18158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18159 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18160 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18161 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18169 does not necessarily mean
18170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18174 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18178 This is why we call them
18179 \begin_inset Quotes els
18183 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18199 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18201 \begin_inset Quotes els
18205 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18208 ) can be obtained by means of the shortcut
18211 arg "quote-insert inner"
18216 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18222 \begin_layout Standard
18223 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18224 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18225 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18226 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18227 If you check the setting
18229 Use dynamic quotation marks
18233 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18234 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18237 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18238 they appear in a special color).
18239 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18240 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18245 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18248 \begin_layout Standard
18249 Individual quotation marks (i.
18250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18253 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18254 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18258 \begin_layout Subsection
18260 \begin_inset Index idx
18263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18264 Typography ! Ligatures
18270 \begin_inset Index idx
18273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18302 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18304 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18311 \begin_layout Standard
18312 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18313 print them as single characters.
18314 These groups are known as
18319 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18320 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18322 Here are the standard ligatures:
18325 \begin_layout Itemize
18329 \begin_layout Itemize
18333 \begin_layout Itemize
18337 \begin_layout Itemize
18341 \begin_layout Itemize
18345 \begin_layout Standard
18346 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18349 \begin_layout Standard
18350 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18351 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18352 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18356 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18359 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18375 To break a ligature, use
18377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18378 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18380 \begin_inset space ~
18387 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18391 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18395 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18398 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18400 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18415 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18423 \begin_layout Subsection
18425 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18427 \begin_inset Index idx
18430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18440 \begin_layout Standard
18443 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18444 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18448 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18451 \begin_layout Description
18453 The name of the game.
18456 \begin_layout Description
18458 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18462 \begin_layout Description
18464 The \SpecialChar TeX
18465 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18469 \begin_layout Description
18470 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18471 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18475 \begin_layout Standard
18476 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18478 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18482 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18486 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18490 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18491 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18492 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18493 converges to the number
18494 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18497 : The actual version is
18498 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18503 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18506 , the previous one was
18507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18512 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18518 \begin_layout Subsection
18520 \begin_inset Index idx
18523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18532 \begin_layout Standard
18533 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18534 space between two words.
18535 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18538 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18542 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18545 for units use the menu
18547 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18548 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18550 \begin_inset space ~
18558 arg "space-insert thin"
18564 \begin_layout Standard
18565 Here is an example to show the differences:
18568 \begin_layout Standard
18569 \begin_inset Tabular
18570 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18571 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18572 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18573 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18575 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18578 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18580 \begin_inset space ~
18584 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18592 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18596 space between number and unit
18603 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18608 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18612 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18624 half space between number and unit
18637 \begin_layout Subsection
18639 \begin_inset Index idx
18642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18643 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18651 \begin_layout Standard
18652 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18654 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18655 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18656 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18657 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18658 These bits of text became known as
18669 \begin_layout Standard
18670 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18671 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18672 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18673 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18674 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18675 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18676 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18677 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18678 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18679 \begin_inset Newline newline
18687 \begin_inset Newline newline
18695 \begin_inset Newline newline
18698 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18699 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18700 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18702 \begin_inset space ~
18706 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18708 key "latexcompanion"
18714 \begin_inset space ~
18718 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18725 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18726 's page break mechanism.
18729 \begin_layout Chapter
18730 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18733 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18740 \begin_layout Standard
18741 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18744 \begin_inset space ~
18750 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18753 \begin_layout Section
18755 \begin_inset Index idx
18758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18765 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18774 \begin_layout Standard
18776 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18779 \begin_layout Description
18782 \begin_inset space ~
18785 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18786 \begin_inset Newline newline
18790 \begin_inset Note Note
18793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18794 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18802 \begin_layout Description
18803 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18804 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18805 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18808 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18809 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18811 \begin_inset space ~
18817 \begin_inset Newline newline
18821 \begin_inset Note Comment
18824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18825 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18834 \begin_layout Description
18836 \begin_inset space ~
18839 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18840 set in the document settings under
18842 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18844 \begin_inset space ~
18850 \begin_inset Newline newline
18854 \begin_inset Newline newline
18858 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18867 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18868 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18873 of a comment that appears in the output.
18879 \begin_inset Newline newline
18883 \begin_inset Newline newline
18886 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18889 \begin_layout Standard
18890 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18898 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18902 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18905 \begin_layout Section
18907 \begin_inset Index idx
18910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18919 name "sec:Footnotes"
18926 \begin_layout Standard
18928 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18931 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18934 or the toolbar button
18937 arg "footnote-insert"
18949 \begin_inset Graphics
18950 filename clipart/footnote.png
18959 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18960 's representation of your footnote.
18970 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18978 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18989 label, the box will
18993 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18994 Clicking on the box label again will close
19007 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
19008 and click on the footnote
19023 \begin_layout Standard
19024 Here is an example footnote:
19032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19033 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
19041 \begin_layout Standard
19042 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
19043 position where the footnote box is placed.
19044 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
19045 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
19046 according to the document class.
19048 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
19049 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19055 ey are described in the
19058 \begin_inset space ~
19066 \begin_layout Section
19068 \begin_inset Index idx
19071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19080 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19087 \begin_layout Standard
19088 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19090 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19092 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19094 \begin_inset space ~
19099 or the toolbar button
19102 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19121 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19125 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19128 appearing within your text.
19129 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19130 's representation of your margin
19139 \begin_layout Standard
19140 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19144 \begin_inset Marginal
19147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19149 This is a marginal note.
19157 \begin_layout Standard
19158 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19159 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19160 pages, right on odd pages.
19163 \begin_layout Standard
19164 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19167 \begin_inset space ~
19175 \begin_inset space ~
19183 \begin_layout Section
19184 Graphics and Images
19185 \begin_inset Index idx
19188 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19195 \begin_inset Index idx
19198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19205 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19207 name "sec:Graphics"
19214 \begin_layout Standard
19215 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19216 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19219 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19228 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19231 \begin_layout Standard
19232 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19237 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19238 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19240 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19241 \begin_inset space ~
19245 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19247 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19254 \begin_layout Standard
19259 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19260 of the image in the output.
19261 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19265 \begin_inset space ~
19269 \begin_inset space ~
19278 \begin_inset space ~
19282 \begin_inset space ~
19286 \begin_inset space ~
19291 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19292 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19300 \begin_layout Standard
19304 \begin_inset space ~
19308 \begin_inset space ~
19313 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19314 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19316 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19321 \begin_inset space ~
19326 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19327 with the image size is printed.
19330 \begin_layout Standard
19331 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19332 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19334 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19337 \begin_layout Standard
19339 \begin_inset Graphics
19340 filename clipart/2D-intensity-plot.pdf
19348 \begin_layout Standard
19349 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19350 the image into a float, see section
19351 \begin_inset space ~
19355 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19357 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19364 \begin_layout Subsection
19366 \begin_inset Index idx
19369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19376 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19378 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19385 \begin_layout Standard
19386 You can insert images in any known file format.
19387 But as we explained in section
19388 \begin_inset space ~
19392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19394 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19398 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19400 therefore uses the program
19404 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19405 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19406 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19407 \begin_inset space ~
19411 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19413 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19420 \begin_layout Standard
19421 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19424 \begin_layout Description
19426 \begin_inset space ~
19429 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19430 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19431 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19432 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19435 Graphics Interchange Format
19436 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19439 (GIF, file extension
19440 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19452 \begin_inset Index idx
19455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19487 Portable Network Graphics
19488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19491 (PNG, file extension
19492 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19500 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19504 \begin_inset Index idx
19507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19512 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19536 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19539 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19540 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19543 (JPG, file extension
19544 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19552 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19568 \begin_inset Index idx
19571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19602 \begin_layout Description
19604 \begin_inset space ~
19607 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19609 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19610 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19611 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19612 \begin_inset Newline newline
19615 Scalable image formats can be
19616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19619 Scalable Vector Graphics
19620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19623 (SVG, file extension
19624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19632 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19636 \begin_inset Index idx
19639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19671 Encapsulated PostScript
19672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19675 (EPS, file extension
19676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19688 \begin_inset Index idx
19691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19720 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19723 Portable Document Format
19724 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19727 (PDF, file extension
19728 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19736 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19740 \begin_inset Index idx
19743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19758 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19759 result will not be scalable.
19760 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19766 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19774 \begin_layout Standard
19775 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19782 \begin_layout Subsection
19783 Grouping of Image Settings
19784 \begin_inset Index idx
19787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19788 Images ! Settings grouping
19796 \begin_layout Standard
19797 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19799 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19800 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19802 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19803 need to manually change each of them.
19807 \begin_layout Standard
19808 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19811 \begin_inset space ~
19815 \begin_inset space ~
19827 \begin_inset space ~
19831 \begin_inset space ~
19837 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19838 and checking the name of the desired group.
19841 \begin_layout Section
19843 \begin_inset Index idx
19846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19853 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19862 \begin_layout Standard
19863 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19866 arg "tabular-insert"
19871 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19875 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19876 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19877 from the rest of the table.
19878 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19879 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19881 Here is an example table:
19884 \begin_layout Standard
19886 \begin_inset Tabular
19887 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19888 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19889 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19890 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19891 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19892 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19903 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19906 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19921 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19924 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19941 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19944 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20015 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20018 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20075 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20092 \begin_layout Subsection
20096 \begin_layout Standard
20097 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20100 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20104 This brings up the table dialog.
20105 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20106 cursor is placed currently.
20107 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20108 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20109 done on all of your selection.
20112 \begin_layout Standard
20113 In addition to the table dialog, the
20116 \begin_inset space ~
20121 helps you in setting table properties.
20122 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20125 \begin_layout Standard
20129 \begin_inset space ~
20134 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20135 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20136 current cell respectively.
20137 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20139 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20140 of text, see section
20141 \begin_inset space ~
20145 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20147 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20154 \begin_layout Standard
20155 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20156 using the check box
20165 This will merge the cells to
20169 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20170 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20171 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20172 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20173 in the last row without the upper border:
20176 \begin_layout Standard
20178 \begin_inset Tabular
20179 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20180 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20181 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20182 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20183 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20184 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20195 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20198 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20204 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20271 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20274 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20280 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20289 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20315 \begin_layout Standard
20316 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20317 -arguments for the table.
20318 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20319 explained in the chapter
20326 \begin_inset space ~
20332 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20333 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20334 but are visible in the output.
20337 \begin_layout Standard
20338 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20346 Most DVI-viewers are
20350 able to display rotations.
20358 \begin_layout Standard
20363 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20368 adds lines for all cell borders.
20371 \begin_layout Subsection
20373 \begin_inset Index idx
20376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20377 Tables ! Multi-page
20383 \begin_inset Index idx
20386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20395 \begin_layout Standard
20396 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20399 \begin_inset space ~
20403 \begin_inset space ~
20411 \begin_inset space ~
20416 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20417 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20420 \begin_layout Description
20425 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20426 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20427 Except for the first page, if
20430 \begin_inset space ~
20438 \begin_layout Description
20442 \begin_inset space ~
20447 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20448 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20451 \begin_layout Description
20456 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20457 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20458 except for the last page, if
20461 \begin_inset space ~
20469 \begin_layout Description
20473 \begin_inset space ~
20478 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20479 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20482 \begin_layout Description
20483 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20484 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20486 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20490 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20493 \begin_inset space ~
20501 \begin_layout Standard
20502 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20503 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20504 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20510 In this context, first means first in this order:
20513 \begin_inset space ~
20525 \begin_inset space ~
20530 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20533 \begin_layout Standard
20535 \begin_inset Tabular
20536 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20537 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20538 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20539 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20540 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20541 <row endfirsthead="true">
20542 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20548 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20553 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20572 <row endfirsthead="true">
20573 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20584 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20605 <row endhead="true">
20606 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20617 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20636 <row endhead="true">
20637 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20640 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20648 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20669 <row endfoot="true">
20670 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20681 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20690 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20693 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20701 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20721 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20732 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20752 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20763 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20766 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20805 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20814 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20825 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20828 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20836 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20845 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20867 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20870 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20876 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20887 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20898 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20907 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20918 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20929 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20932 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20949 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20952 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20980 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20991 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21000 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21042 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21045 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21062 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21065 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21073 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21076 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21084 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21087 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21093 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21096 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21104 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21107 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21124 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21127 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21135 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21146 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21155 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21158 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21228 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21239 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21242 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21259 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21279 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21301 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21310 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21341 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21372 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21394 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21403 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21414 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21425 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21428 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21434 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21437 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21465 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21487 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21496 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21499 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21518 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21527 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21538 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21558 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21561 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21662 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21671 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21680 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21691 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21711 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21722 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21733 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21736 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21742 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21753 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21773 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21784 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21804 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21815 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21835 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21838 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21846 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21857 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21877 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21897 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21908 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21919 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21928 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21939 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21950 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21959 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21962 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21970 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21981 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21984 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22001 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22021 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22032 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22052 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22055 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22063 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22074 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22077 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22094 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22125 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22156 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22167 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22187 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22198 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22201 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22207 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22218 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22249 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22260 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22269 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22272 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22280 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22283 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22291 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22311 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22331 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22334 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22342 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22373 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22376 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22393 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22404 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22435 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22446 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22455 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22466 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22477 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22486 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22489 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22497 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22508 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22528 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22559 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22570 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22573 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22579 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22590 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22601 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22610 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22613 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22621 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22651 <row endlastfoot="true">
22652 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22663 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22666 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22672 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22689 \begin_layout Subsection
22691 \begin_inset Index idx
22694 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22703 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22710 \begin_layout Standard
22711 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22712 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22713 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22714 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22718 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22721 \begin_layout Standard
22722 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22723 for the column in the table dialog.
22724 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22725 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22729 \begin_layout Standard
22731 \begin_inset Tabular
22732 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22733 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22734 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22735 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22736 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22738 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22741 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22756 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22774 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22794 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22825 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22830 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22850 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22868 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22881 This is longer now.
22886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22906 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22937 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22938 This is longer now.
22943 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22946 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22969 \begin_layout Standard
22970 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22971 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22976 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22977 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22983 Selection with the mouse or with
22987 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22988 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22989 the selection from outside the table.
22992 \begin_layout Section
22994 \begin_inset Index idx
22997 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23004 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23013 \begin_layout Subsection
23017 \begin_layout Standard
23018 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
23019 have a fixed location.
23021 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23025 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23028 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
23036 \begin_inset space ~
23041 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
23042 too many notes on the current page.
23045 \begin_layout Standard
23046 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
23047 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
23048 and pages without text.
23049 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
23050 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
23051 Floats are therefore numbered.
23052 Referencing is described in section
23053 \begin_inset space ~
23057 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23059 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23066 \begin_layout Standard
23067 To insert a float, use the menu
23069 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23073 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23074 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23076 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23077 \begin_inset Index idx
23080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23086 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23087 paragraph within the float.
23088 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23089 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23090 left-clicking on the box label.
23091 A closed float box looks like this:
23092 \begin_inset Graphics
23093 filename clipart/float.png
23098 – a gray button with a red label.
23101 \begin_layout Standard
23102 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23104 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23107 \begin_layout Subsection
23109 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23111 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23116 \begin_inset Index idx
23119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23120 Floats ! Figure floats
23128 \begin_layout Standard
23130 \begin_inset space ~
23134 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23136 reference "fig:A-star-in"
23140 was created using the menu
23142 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23143 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23149 arg "float-insert figure"
23153 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23156 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23162 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23166 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23167 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23169 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23171 \begin_inset space ~
23179 arg "layout-paragraph"
23185 \begin_layout Standard
23186 \begin_inset Float figure
23191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23193 \begin_inset Graphics
23194 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23204 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23207 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23209 name "fig:A-star-in"
23226 \begin_layout Standard
23227 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23228 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23230 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23239 ) and refer to it using the menu
23241 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23247 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23251 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23252 vague references like
23253 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23257 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23260 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23261 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23271 For more about cross-references, see section
23272 \begin_inset space ~
23276 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23278 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23285 \begin_layout Standard
23286 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23287 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23288 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23289 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23290 as described in section
23291 \begin_inset space ~
23295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23297 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23303 \begin_inset space ~
23307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23309 reference "fig:Two-images"
23313 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23314 You can also set the images one below the other.
23316 \begin_inset space ~
23320 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23322 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23329 reference "fig:Star"
23333 are the subfigures.
23336 \begin_layout Standard
23337 \begin_inset Float figure
23342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23343 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23347 \begin_inset Float figure
23352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23353 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23358 name "fig:Undefinable"
23370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23371 \begin_inset Graphics
23372 filename clipart/3D-structure-distort.pdf
23384 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23388 \begin_inset Float figure
23393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23394 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23397 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23412 \begin_inset Graphics
23413 filename clipart/Star-structure.pdf
23425 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23432 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23435 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23437 name "fig:Two-images"
23454 \begin_layout Subsection
23456 \begin_inset Index idx
23459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23460 Floats ! Table floats
23468 \begin_layout Standard
23469 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23471 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23472 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23475 or the toolbar button
23478 arg "float-insert table"
23482 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23483 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23484 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23486 \begin_inset space ~
23490 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23492 reference "tab:Table-float"
23499 \begin_layout Standard
23500 \begin_inset Float table
23505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23506 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23509 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23511 name "tab:Table-float"
23523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23525 \begin_inset Tabular
23526 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23527 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23528 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23529 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23530 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23624 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23657 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23665 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23668 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23678 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23681 \end{array}\right]$
23689 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23692 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23702 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23723 \begin_layout Subsection
23725 \begin_inset Index idx
23728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23737 \begin_layout Standard
23739 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23740 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23741 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23743 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23751 \begin_inset space ~
23759 \begin_layout Section
23761 \begin_inset Index idx
23764 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23773 \begin_layout Standard
23775 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23777 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23778 \begin_inset space \space{}
23785 \begin_layout Standard
23786 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23787 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23789 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23793 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23794 and its alignment within the page.
23797 \begin_layout Standard
23799 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23809 height_special "totalheight"
23814 backgroundcolor "none"
23817 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23820 This is a minipage.
23821 The text is set in an italic style.
23824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23827 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23828 another formatting.
23836 \begin_layout Standard
23837 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23840 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23844 as described in section
23845 \begin_inset space ~
23849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23851 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23856 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23862 \begin_layout Standard
23863 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23873 height_special "totalheight"
23878 backgroundcolor "none"
23881 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23882 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23883 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23889 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23893 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23903 height_special "totalheight"
23908 backgroundcolor "none"
23911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23912 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23913 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23921 \begin_layout Standard
23922 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23928 \begin_layout Standard
23929 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23931 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23938 \begin_inset space ~
23946 \begin_layout Chapter
23947 Mathematical Formulas
23948 \begin_inset Index idx
23951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23958 \begin_inset Index idx
23961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23990 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23992 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23999 \begin_layout Standard
24000 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
24005 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
24008 \begin_layout Section
24010 \begin_inset Index idx
24013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24022 \begin_layout Standard
24023 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
24036 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
24038 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
24039 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
24040 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
24042 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
24048 \begin_layout Standard
24049 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
24053 \begin_inset space ~
24058 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24061 \begin_layout Standard
24062 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24063 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24066 \begin_layout Standard
24067 This is a line with an inline formula
24068 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24074 \begin_layout Standard
24075 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24076 paragraph, like this one:
24077 \begin_inset Formula
24084 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24087 \begin_layout Standard
24089 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24091 For example, typing
24092 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24105 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24106 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24110 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24113 \begin_inset space ~
24121 \begin_layout Subsection
24122 Navigating in Formulas
24123 \begin_inset Index idx
24126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24135 \begin_layout Standard
24136 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24137 achieved with the arrow keys.
24139 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24140 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24145 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24146 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24150 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24154 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24157 \end{array}\right]$
24165 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24170 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24171 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24174 \begin_layout Standard
24179 , printed in this document as
24180 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24184 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24188 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24191 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24192 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24193 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24198 For example, if you want
24199 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24207 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24217 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24221 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24226 , since in the latter case only the
24229 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24234 will be under the square root sign:
24235 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24241 \begin_layout Standard
24242 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24244 \begin_inset Formula
24246 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24255 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24256 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24259 \begin_layout Subsection
24263 \begin_layout Standard
24264 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24265 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24269 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24270 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24271 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24272 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24273 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24277 \begin_layout Subsection
24278 Exponents and Subscripts
24279 \begin_inset Index idx
24282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24289 \begin_inset Index idx
24292 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24301 \begin_layout Standard
24302 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24305 arg "math-superscript"
24311 arg "math-subscript"
24314 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24316 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24319 , type in a formula
24322 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24332 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24338 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24342 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24348 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24354 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24363 , you have to use an extra
24367 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24368 For example, if you want
24369 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24375 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24381 Subscripts are similar: To get
24382 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24388 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24396 \begin_layout Subsection
24398 \begin_inset Index idx
24401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24410 \begin_layout Standard
24411 Create a fraction either with the command
24417 or by using the icon
24420 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24426 \begin_inset space ~
24432 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24433 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24434 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24439 To move back up, press
24444 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24445 \begin_inset Formula
24447 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24450 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24458 \begin_layout Subsection
24460 \begin_inset Index idx
24463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24472 \begin_layout Standard
24473 Roots can be created using the
24476 \begin_inset space ~
24484 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24490 arg "math-insert \\root"
24512 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24518 always produces a square root.
24521 \begin_layout Subsection
24522 Operators with Limits
24523 \begin_inset Index idx
24526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24533 \begin_inset Index idx
24536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24543 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24545 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24552 \begin_layout Standard
24554 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24558 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24561 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24562 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24563 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24564 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24565 The sum operator will automatically place its
24566 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24570 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24573 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24575 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24579 \begin_inset Formula
24581 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24586 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24590 \begin_layout Standard
24591 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24593 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24594 behind the operator and using the menu
24596 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24597 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24599 \begin_inset space ~
24603 \begin_inset space ~
24617 \begin_layout Standard
24618 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24623 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24627 \begin_inset Index idx
24630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24637 \begin_inset Formula
24639 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24644 which will place the
24645 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24649 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24653 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24657 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24658 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24664 \begin_layout Standard
24665 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24672 Have a look at section
24673 \begin_inset space ~
24677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24679 reference "subsec:Functions"
24683 for an explanation of function macros.
24686 \begin_layout Subsection
24688 \begin_inset Index idx
24691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24700 \begin_layout Standard
24701 Most math symbols can be found in the
24704 \begin_inset space ~
24709 under one of several categories; including
24726 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24730 \begin_layout Standard
24731 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24732 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24733 don't have to use the
24736 \begin_inset space ~
24741 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24743 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24746 \begin_layout Subsection
24748 \begin_inset Index idx
24751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24760 \begin_layout Standard
24761 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24767 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24773 \begin_inset space ~
24781 arg "math-insert \\space"
24785 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24786 For example, the sequence
24791 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24794 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24796 \begin_inset Graphics
24797 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24802 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24803 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24804 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24805 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24806 , because they are negative
24808 Here are two examples:
24811 \begin_layout Standard
24821 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24827 \begin_layout Standard
24837 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24843 \begin_layout Subsection
24845 \begin_inset Index idx
24848 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24855 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24857 name "subsec:Functions"
24864 \begin_layout Standard
24868 \begin_inset space ~
24873 contains under the button
24876 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24879 a number of function macros, such as
24880 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24884 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24892 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24899 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24900 avoid confusions, because
24901 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24905 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24911 \begin_layout Standard
24912 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24914 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24918 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24924 \begin_layout Standard
24925 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24926 are placed, as described in section
24927 \begin_inset space ~
24931 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24933 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24940 \begin_layout Subsection
24942 \begin_inset Index idx
24945 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24954 \begin_layout Standard
24955 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24957 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24958 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24959 commands, for example, to enter
24960 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24963 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24964 Our example is entered by typing
24969 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24976 \begin_inset space ~
24980 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24982 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24986 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24989 \begin_layout Standard
24990 \begin_inset Float table
24995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24996 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24999 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25001 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
25005 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
25013 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25015 \begin_inset Tabular
25016 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
25017 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
25018 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25019 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25020 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
25022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25031 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25040 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25078 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25081 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25104 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25114 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25158 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25168 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25171 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25212 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25222 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25225 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25240 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25243 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25266 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25320 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25330 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25361 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25374 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25384 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25387 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25402 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25428 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25456 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25459 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25469 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25472 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25482 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25492 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25495 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25536 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25581 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25602 \begin_layout Standard
25603 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25606 \begin_inset space ~
25614 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25617 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25621 \begin_layout Section
25622 Brackets and Delimiters
25623 \begin_inset Index idx
25626 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25633 \begin_inset Index idx
25636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25643 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25645 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25652 \begin_layout Standard
25653 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25655 For some purposes, using just the keys
25660 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25661 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25662 toolbar delimiter icon
25665 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25669 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25670 \begin_inset Formula
25672 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25680 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25681 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25685 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25688 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25694 \begin_inset Formula
25696 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25704 \begin_layout Standard
25705 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25706 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25710 \begin_layout Standard
25711 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25712 left side and right side.
25713 If you use the option
25716 \begin_inset space ~
25721 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25722 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25724 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25729 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25730 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25733 \begin_layout Standard
25734 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25735 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25736 is to go inside the brackets.
25737 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25742 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25743 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25744 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25748 arg "math-delim ( )"
25754 \begin_layout Section
25755 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25756 \begin_inset Index idx
25759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25766 \begin_inset Index idx
25769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25776 \begin_inset Index idx
25779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25780 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25788 \begin_layout Standard
25789 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25793 \begin_inset space ~
25801 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25805 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25806 Here is an example:
25807 \begin_inset Formula
25809 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25818 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25819 \begin_inset space ~
25823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25825 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25830 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25831 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25832 This alignment is set in the box
25837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25849 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25857 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25861 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25869 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25875 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25886 for every column as default.
25887 For example, the sequence
25888 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25896 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25899 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25900 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25901 corresponds to the relevant column.
25902 The result will look like this:
25903 \begin_inset Formula
25906 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25907 column & has & has\,right\\
25908 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25917 \begin_layout Standard
25918 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25921 arg "newline-insert newline"
25924 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25925 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25927 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25930 or the math toolbar.
25933 \begin_layout Standard
25934 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25935 It can be created with the menu
25937 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25938 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25940 \begin_inset space ~
25952 Here is an example:
25953 \begin_inset Formula
25967 \begin_layout Standard
25968 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25971 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25974 arg "newline-insert newline"
25978 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25983 arg "newline-insert newline"
25986 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25987 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25991 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25994 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25995 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25996 A new row is created by every further entry of
25999 arg "newline-insert newline"
26003 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
26004 Here is an example:
26005 \begin_inset Formula
26007 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
26008 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
26013 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
26014 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
26015 \begin_inset Formula
26017 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
26025 \begin_layout Standard
26026 The multi-line formula type described here is called
26033 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
26034 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
26035 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26037 reference "eq:asquared"
26042 The other types are described in section
26043 \begin_inset space ~
26047 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26049 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26056 \begin_layout Section
26057 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26058 \begin_inset Index idx
26061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26062 Math ! Formula numbering
26068 \begin_inset Index idx
26071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26072 Math ! Referencing formulas
26078 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26080 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26087 \begin_layout Standard
26088 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26090 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26091 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26093 \begin_inset space ~
26097 \begin_inset space ~
26105 arg "math-number-toggle"
26109 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26110 within parentheses.
26111 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26112 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26113 the document class.
26114 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26115 separated by a dot:
26116 \begin_inset Formula
26126 arg "math-number-toggle"
26129 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26130 You can only number displayed formulas.
26133 \begin_layout Standard
26134 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26136 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26137 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26139 \begin_inset space ~
26143 \begin_inset space ~
26151 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26154 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26155 \begin_inset Formula
26158 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26164 To number all lines use the shortcut
26167 arg "math-number-toggle"
26173 \begin_layout Standard
26174 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26177 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26178 A label is inserted with the menu
26180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26189 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26190 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26191 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26203 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26204 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26205 We inserted in the following example the label
26206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26213 in the second line:
26214 \begin_inset Formula
26216 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26217 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26222 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26223 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26224 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26228 \begin_inset space ~
26236 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26240 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26241 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26242 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26243 as the formula number:
26246 \begin_layout Standard
26247 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26248 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26250 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26257 \begin_layout Standard
26258 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26259 's cross-reference box are described in section
26260 \begin_inset space ~
26264 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26266 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26271 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26279 \begin_layout Section
26280 User defined math macros
26281 \begin_inset Index idx
26284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26293 \begin_layout Standard
26295 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26296 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26297 Math macros are explained in section
26300 \begin_inset space ~
26312 \begin_layout Section
26316 \begin_layout Subsection
26318 \begin_inset Index idx
26321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26330 \begin_layout Standard
26331 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26332 To set a font in a formula, use the
26335 \begin_inset space ~
26343 arg "math-insert \\font"
26346 , or enter its command, listed in table
26347 \begin_inset space ~
26351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26353 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26360 \begin_layout Standard
26361 \begin_inset Float table
26366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26367 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26370 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26372 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26376 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26386 \begin_inset Tabular
26387 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26388 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26389 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26390 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26392 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26422 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26430 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26449 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26457 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26509 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26536 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26544 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26547 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26563 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26597 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26605 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26608 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26624 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26632 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26658 \begin_layout Standard
26659 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26667 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26683 \begin_layout Standard
26684 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26685 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26690 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26691 space when you need a space in the box.
26692 Here is an example where
26693 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26697 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26704 denotes the set of numbers:
26705 \begin_inset Formula
26707 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26715 \begin_layout Standard
26716 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26717 You can, for example, put a character in
26726 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26730 \begin_inset Newline newline
26733 So it is better not to use this feature.
26736 \begin_layout Standard
26737 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26738 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26742 \begin_inset Newline newline
26745 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26751 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26752 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26758 \begin_layout Standard
26765 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26768 \begin_layout Standard
26769 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26771 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26772 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26774 \begin_inset space ~
26782 \begin_layout Subsection
26784 \begin_inset Index idx
26787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26796 \begin_layout Standard
26797 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26799 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26803 \begin_inset space ~
26807 \begin_inset space ~
26815 \begin_inset space ~
26823 arg "math-insert \\font"
26827 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26828 in black instead of blue.
26829 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26830 Here is an example:
26831 \begin_inset Formula
26834 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26835 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26844 \begin_layout Subsection
26846 \begin_inset Index idx
26849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26858 \begin_layout Standard
26859 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26860 automatically chosen in most situations.
26878 For most characters,
26886 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26887 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26892 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26893 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26894 thinks are appropriate.
26895 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26898 arg "math-insert \\style"
26902 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26903 For example, you can set
26904 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26907 , which is normally in
26916 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26920 The four styles are used in the following example:
26923 \begin_layout Standard
26924 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26928 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26932 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26936 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26942 \begin_layout Standard
26943 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26944 is set in a particular size with the menu
26946 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26948 \begin_inset space ~
26953 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26954 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26955 will be adjusted to correspond.
26956 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26957 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26961 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26967 \begin_layout Standard
26971 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26977 \begin_layout Section
26978 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26980 \begin_inset Index idx
26983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26990 \begin_inset Index idx
26993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27002 \begin_layout Standard
27004 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
27005 that are in common use.
27008 \begin_layout Subsection
27009 Enabling AMS-Support
27012 \begin_layout Standard
27013 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
27014 the document by selecting the checkbox
27017 \begin_inset space ~
27021 \begin_inset space ~
27025 \begin_inset space ~
27032 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27036 \begin_inset Index idx
27039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27040 Document ! Settings
27048 \begin_inset space ~
27054 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
27055 -errors in formulas,
27056 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27059 \begin_layout Subsection
27061 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27063 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27068 \begin_inset Index idx
27071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27072 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27080 \begin_layout Standard
27081 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27082 provides a selection of different formula types.
27084 allows you to choose between
27105 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27106 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27113 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27116 \begin_layout Chapter
27120 \begin_layout Section
27122 \begin_inset Index idx
27125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27132 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27134 name "sec:Cross-References"
27141 \begin_layout Standard
27142 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27143 's strengths is cross-references.
27144 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27146 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27147 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27148 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27151 \begin_layout Enumerate
27155 \begin_layout Enumerate
27156 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27158 name "enu:Second-item"
27165 \begin_layout Enumerate
27169 \begin_layout Standard
27170 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27172 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27175 or by pressing the toolbar button
27182 A gray label box like this:
27183 \begin_inset Graphics
27184 filename clipart/label.png
27188 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27190 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27192 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27205 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27213 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27217 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27225 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27226 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27228 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27242 \begin_layout Standard
27243 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27245 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27248 or the toolbar button
27251 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27255 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27256 \begin_inset Graphics
27257 filename clipart/reference.png
27261 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27263 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27272 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27276 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27280 \begin_layout Standard
27281 As an alternative to
27283 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27286 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27291 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27292 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27294 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27306 \begin_layout Standard
27307 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27308 \begin_inset space ~
27312 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27314 reference "enu:Second-item"
27321 \begin_layout Standard
27322 It is recommended to use a protected space
27326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27327 described in section
27328 \begin_inset space ~
27332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27334 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27343 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27344 line breaks between them.
27347 \begin_layout Standard
27348 There are eight formats of cross-references:
27351 \begin_layout Description
27352 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27353 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27355 reference "fig:Two-images"
27362 \begin_layout Description
27363 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27364 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27366 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27374 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27376 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27383 \begin_layout Description
27384 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27385 \begin_inset space ~
27389 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27390 LatexCommand pageref
27391 reference "fig:Two-images"
27398 \begin_layout Description
27400 \begin_inset space ~
27404 \begin_inset space ~
27407 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27408 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27409 LatexCommand vpageref
27410 reference "fig:Two-images"
27415 \begin_inset Newline newline
27418 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27419 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27420 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27421 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27422 it prints “on the next page”.
27423 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27426 \begin_layout Description
27428 \begin_inset space ~
27432 \begin_inset space ~
27436 \begin_inset space ~
27439 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27440 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27442 reference "fig:Two-images"
27447 \begin_inset Newline newline
27450 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27456 ; otherwise it behaves like
27460 \begin_inset space ~
27464 \begin_inset space ~
27473 \begin_layout Description
27475 \begin_inset space ~
27478 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27479 \begin_inset Newline newline
27483 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27491 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27501 \begin_inset Index idx
27504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27506 packages ! prettyref
27512 \begin_inset Index idx
27515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27517 packages ! refstyle
27528 \begin_inset Newline newline
27531 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27532 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27535 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27540 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27548 is the default and preferred because
27552 supports only English documents.
27553 The format is specified by using the command
27565 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27566 preamble of the document.
27567 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27585 \begin_inset Newline newline
27592 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27597 \begin_inset Newline newline
27608 predefines reference formats for all available types.
27609 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27611 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27612 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27617 , you might do so as follows:
27618 \begin_inset Newline newline
27625 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27630 \begin_inset Newline newline
27633 For more information about defining formatted references, have a look at
27634 the package documentation
27635 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27637 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27643 \begin_inset Newline newline
27654 will be available with formatted references only if you are using the
27661 \begin_layout Description
27663 \begin_inset space ~
27666 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27668 LatexCommand nameref
27669 reference "fig:Two-images"
27676 \begin_layout Description
27678 \begin_inset space ~
27681 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27682 label for the reference:
27683 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27684 LatexCommand labelonly
27685 reference "fig:Two-images"
27690 \begin_inset Newline newline
27693 This allows for customization, using \SpecialChar TeX
27694 Code, if you want to issue a command
27695 that \SpecialChar LyX
27701 , then you may want to use the
27704 \begin_inset space ~
27709 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27711 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27715 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27719 This is the form needed for e.
27720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
27724 \begin_inset space \space{}
27731 's range commands.The number and current page of the referenced document
27732 part in the output is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27734 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27738 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27742 \begin_layout Standard
27743 You can only use the style
27747 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27751 is always possible.
27754 \begin_layout Standard
27755 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27756 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27758 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27759 \begin_inset space ~
27763 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27765 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27772 \begin_layout Standard
27773 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27777 \begin_inset space ~
27781 \begin_inset space ~
27786 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27787 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27790 \begin_inset space ~
27795 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27796 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27799 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27805 \begin_layout Standard
27806 You can change labels at any time.
27807 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27808 do not need to think about this.
27811 \begin_layout Standard
27812 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27814 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27818 \begin_layout Standard
27819 References are described in detail in the section
27820 \begin_inset space ~
27830 \begin_inset space ~
27838 \begin_layout Section
27839 Table of Contents and other Listings
27840 \begin_inset Index idx
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27850 \begin_inset Index idx
27853 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27854 Navigating ! Outline
27860 \begin_inset Index idx
27863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27870 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27879 \begin_layout Subsection
27881 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27883 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27890 \begin_layout Standard
27891 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27893 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27894 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27896 \begin_inset space ~
27900 \begin_inset space ~
27906 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27908 If you click on it, the
27912 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27913 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27914 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27916 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27918 \begin_inset space ~
27923 that is described in section
27924 \begin_inset space ~
27928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27930 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27937 \begin_layout Standard
27938 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27939 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27941 \begin_inset space ~
27945 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27947 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27951 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27953 \begin_inset space ~
27957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27959 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27963 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27965 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27968 \begin_layout Subsection
27969 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
27970 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27972 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
27979 \begin_layout Standard
27980 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
27982 You can insert them via the
27984 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27988 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
27991 \begin_layout Section
27992 URLs and Hyperlinks
27993 \begin_inset Index idx
27996 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28003 \begin_inset Index idx
28006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28015 \begin_layout Subsection
28017 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28026 \begin_layout Standard
28027 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28029 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28035 \begin_layout Standard
28036 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28038 \begin_inset Flex URL
28041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28051 \begin_layout Standard
28052 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28058 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28062 \begin_layout Standard
28063 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28071 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28080 \begin_layout Subsection
28082 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28084 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28091 \begin_layout Standard
28092 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28094 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28097 or with the toolbar button
28104 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28113 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28114 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28115 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28117 name "LyX's homepage"
28118 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28123 , an Email address like this:
28124 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28126 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28127 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28133 , or a link to a file.
28136 \begin_layout Standard
28137 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28139 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28150 to the link target.
28153 \begin_layout Standard
28154 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28155 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28156 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28157 the text style dialog.
28158 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28162 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28164 name "LyX's homepage"
28165 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28173 \begin_layout Standard
28174 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28178 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28181 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28185 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28187 \begin_inset Newline newline
28195 \begin_inset Newline newline
28202 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28205 \begin_layout Section
28207 \begin_inset Index idx
28210 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28219 name "sec:Appendices"
28226 \begin_layout Standard
28227 Appendices are created with the menu
28229 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28231 \begin_inset space ~
28235 \begin_inset space ~
28241 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28242 as the appendix part of the book.
28243 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28246 \begin_layout Standard
28247 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28248 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28249 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28250 and the subsection number.
28251 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28255 \begin_layout Standard
28257 \begin_inset space ~
28261 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28263 reference "chap:Credits"
28268 \begin_inset space ~
28272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28274 reference "subsec:Export"
28281 \begin_layout Section
28283 \begin_inset Index idx
28286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28293 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28295 name "sec:Bibliography"
28302 \begin_layout Standard
28303 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28305 You can include a bibliography database, which is explained in sec.
28306 \begin_inset space ~
28310 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28312 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28319 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28324 , which is described in the following section (but see also sec.
28325 \begin_inset space ~
28329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28331 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28336 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28337 this document, such as author-year citations, and if you have more than
28338 a handful of references, then you should seriously consider
28342 using a bibliography database.
28345 \begin_layout Standard
28346 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28347 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28351 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28352 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28353 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28354 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28355 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28358 \begin_layout Subsection
28359 The Bibliography Environment
28360 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28362 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28369 \begin_layout Standard
28374 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28376 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28385 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28387 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28388 of ASCII characters only.
28392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28394 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28397 target "https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII#Character_set"
28403 \begin_inset Newline newline
28407 \begin_inset Flex URL
28410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28412 https://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/ASCII
28424 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28427 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28431 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28434 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28437 \begin_layout Standard
28438 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28440 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28443 or the toolbar button
28446 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28450 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28451 containing the available citations.
28452 Select one or more keys from the list and
28462 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28463 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28467 \begin_layout Standard
28468 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28469 entry with surrounding brackets.
28474 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28475 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28477 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28481 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28487 \begin_layout Standard
28491 Companion Second Edition
28494 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28496 key "latexcompanion"
28504 \begin_layout Standard
28505 The \SpecialChar LyX
28506 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28507 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28517 \begin_layout Standard
28518 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28525 \begin_inset Index idx
28528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28536 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28537 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28541 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28548 Author A and Author B(Year)
28549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28556 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28558 Then, if you select
28561 \begin_inset space ~
28566 in the document settings
28567 \begin_inset Index idx
28570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28571 Document ! Settings
28578 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28580 \begin_inset space ~
28586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28588 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28595 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28598 \begin_layout Standard
28599 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28602 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28604 \begin_inset space ~
28612 arg "layout-paragraph"
28616 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28619 \begin_layout Subsection
28620 Bibliography databases
28621 \begin_inset Index idx
28624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28625 Bibliography ! Databases
28631 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28633 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28640 \begin_layout Standard
28641 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same references in different
28646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28647 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28649 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28650 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28655 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28657 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28658 your working field in a database.
28659 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28660 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28661 list for that document.
28662 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28666 \begin_layout Standard
28667 The database is a text file with the file extension
28668 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28676 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28679 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28680 The format is explained in
28681 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28688 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28690 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28692 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28698 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28699 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28700 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28702 \begin_inset Flex URL
28705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28707 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28715 \begin_layout Standard
28717 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28718 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28719 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28721 It is quite established and mature and there is a huge range of existing
28723 But it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to more complex bibliographi
28724 c needs and support for specific languages and scripts.
28725 Those are addressed by
28730 \begin_inset Index idx
28733 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28735 packages ! biblatex
28741 It reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28742 (although it has been significantly
28743 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28753 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28754 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28755 might conversely fail to correctly
28756 handle databases that use specific
28765 , but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28769 \begin_layout Standard
28770 To select if Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28775 should be used, set in the document settings (menu
28777 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28781 \begin_inset Index idx
28784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28785 Document ! Settings
28797 \begin_inset space ~
28802 to a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28810 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28811 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28813 \begin_inset Index idx
28816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28817 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28826 \begin_layout Standard
28827 To access a database via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28830 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28835 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28837 \begin_inset space ~
28843 A window will appear in which you can add one or more databases and select
28844 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28852 Add bibliography to TOC
28854 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28859 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28860 in the document or just the cited references.
28863 \begin_layout Standard
28864 The Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28865 style file is a text file with the file extension
28866 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28877 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28878 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28879 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28880 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28882 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28888 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28889 \begin_inset Newline newline
28893 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28895 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28905 In this document we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28910 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
28914 \begin_layout Standard
28915 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
28918 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28920 \begin_inset Index idx
28923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28924 Bibliography ! Biblatex
28930 \begin_inset Index idx
28933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28935 packages ! biblatex
28943 \begin_layout Standard
28944 Accessing a database via
28948 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28956 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28958 \begin_inset space ~
28964 In contrary to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28965 you cannot select a
28970 The other dialog options are the same as with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28974 \begin_layout Standard
28979 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (text file with
28981 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28992 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like and a citation style
28993 file (text file with the file extension
28994 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29002 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29005 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29006 Usually such style files come in pairs and it makes sense to use matching
29008 It is nevertheless possible to mix any citation style with any bibliography
29012 \begin_layout Standard
29017 styles are not set in the
29020 \begin_inset space ~
29025 dialog, but in the document settings.
29026 \begin_inset Index idx
29029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29030 Document ! Settings
29035 However, in the dialog in the
29039 field, which is only visible if you use
29043 , you can enter options that determine how the bibliography is printed (for
29044 example how its heading will appear).
29045 These options are deescribed in detail in the
29050 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29060 \begin_layout Standard
29061 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29062 \begin_inset space ~
29066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29068 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29078 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29079 Bibliography Processors
29082 \begin_layout Standard
29083 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29084 uses a bibliography processor,
29085 that is an external program that reads the database, sorts the citations
29086 and processes the data in a way it can be included in the document.
29087 The classic program is called Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29089 It has the advantage that it is very mature and widespread, but the disadvantag
29090 e that it has severe limitations, due to its age.
29093 \begin_layout Standard
29094 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address some of these
29096 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29097 You can do this on a general level in
29099 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29100 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29101 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29104 or for individual documents in
29106 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29107 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29111 The following variants are available by default:
29114 \begin_layout Description
29115 biber a specific, modern processor
29116 \begin_inset Index idx
29119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29126 developed exclusively for
29130 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29136 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory and many specific features
29141 makes use of; if you use the
29145 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29152 \begin_layout Description
29153 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29154 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29155 with all bibliography packages, although it will probably fail with
29159 bibliographies due to the limited memory.
29162 \begin_layout Description
29163 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29164 (but no Unicode support), larger memory than
29168 , works with all bibliography packages, although more complex
29172 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29176 features are supported.
29179 \begin_layout Standard
29180 By default (with the
29186 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29187 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29200 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29201 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29202 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29205 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29206 selects an appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliography
29219 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29220 -based bibliography styles).
29221 This should suit most needs.
29224 \begin_layout Standard
29225 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29226 By default this is pBib\SpecialChar TeX
29227 (in \SpecialChar LyX
29232 ), a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29233 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29234 You can adjust it in
29236 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29237 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29238 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29244 \begin_layout Standard
29245 Selected bibliography processors can be controlled with options that you
29246 can add below the selection.
29247 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29248 of Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29254 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29264 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29268 \begin_layout Standard
29270 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29272 These are explained in detail in section
29274 Customizing Bibliographies
29278 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29283 Additional Features
29288 \begin_layout Subsection
29290 \begin_inset Index idx
29293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29294 Bibliography ! Citation format
29300 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29302 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29309 \begin_layout Standard
29310 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29311 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29315 \begin_inset space \space{}
29318 numerical citation (as
29319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29323 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29326 like in this document), alpha-numerical citations (as
29327 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29331 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29334 ) or author-year citations (as
29335 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29339 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29344 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29348 \begin_layout Standard
29349 By default a simple numeric citation style is used.
29352 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29353 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29357 \begin_inset Index idx
29360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29361 Document ! Settings
29366 you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred bibliography
29372 environment your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29373 labels, is there to use
29376 \begin_inset space ~
29387 \begin_inset space ~
29392 which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29393 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29395 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29402 \begin_layout Standard
29403 With a bibliography database (see
29404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29406 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29413 ) one has in contrary to the
29417 environment full access to the formatting styles.
29418 These style formats are available:
29421 \begin_layout Description
29423 \begin_inset space ~
29426 (BibTeX) the default Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29427 -based approached without any additional packages
29428 (simple numeric citations).
29431 \begin_layout Description
29432 Biblatex loads the package
29437 \begin_inset Index idx
29440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29442 packages ! biblatex
29447 and lets you select a style in the dropdown boxes
29449 Biblatex citation style
29453 Biblatex bibliography style
29456 Options to the package
29460 can be entered in the
29467 \begin_layout Description
29469 \begin_inset space ~
29473 \begin_inset space ~
29476 mode) loads the package
29480 with the natbib compatibility mode.
29481 This is a specific variant for users who switch an existing document that
29493 behavior very closely.
29498 this option has some additional styles.
29503 styles are also supported by this variant.
29506 \begin_layout Description
29508 \begin_inset space ~
29511 (BibTeX) loads the package
29516 \begin_inset Index idx
29519 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29526 which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29529 \begin_layout Description
29531 \begin_inset space ~
29534 (BibTeX) loads the package
29539 \begin_inset Index idx
29542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29549 which provides citation styles particularly suited for the humanities.
29552 \begin_layout Standard
29561 style formats provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29563 You have to select one style in the dropdown box
29572 formats, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29574 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29575 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected
29577 Biblatex citation style
29580 However, when switching between Author-year and Author-number, a suitable
29586 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29590 \begin_layout Standard
29591 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29592 are available in the
29597 Some selections also provide further options like the option to uppercase
29598 a name prefix such as
29599 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29603 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29607 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29611 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29614 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29619 \begin_inset space \space{}
29623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29634 \begin_layout Standard
29635 In the citation dialog you can also set text to appear after a citation
29637 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29641 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29648 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29652 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29656 Here is a simple example where the text
29657 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29661 \begin_inset space ~
29665 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29668 appears after the reference:
29671 \begin_layout Quote
29673 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29676 key "latexcompanion"
29684 \begin_layout Standard
29685 All styles except for
29689 also provide the feature to add text that precedes the reference (such
29691 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29695 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29699 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
29703 \begin_layout Standard
29704 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
29705 So if you refer to multiple references at once, the prenote will precede
29706 the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the last.
29711 styles allow to add pre- and postnotes to any individual reference in a
29712 multi-citation (so-called
29713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29716 qualified citation lists
29717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29723 If you use such a style and if the current reference includes multiple
29728 dialog will display three columns in the field
29735 \begin_inset space ~
29743 \begin_inset space ~
29751 \begin_inset space ~
29757 If you double-click on an item's
29760 \begin_inset space ~
29768 \begin_inset space ~
29773 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
29776 General text before
29782 fields you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
29785 \begin_layout Section
29787 \begin_inset Index idx
29790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29797 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29806 \begin_layout Standard
29807 An index entry is created if you use the menu
29809 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29811 \begin_inset space ~
29816 or the toolbar button
29823 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
29824 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
29825 by \SpecialChar LyX
29826 as the index entry.
29829 \begin_layout Standard
29830 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
29832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29833 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29835 \begin_inset space ~
29841 A light blue box labeled
29842 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29853 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
29854 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
29858 \begin_layout Standard
29859 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
29860 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
29861 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
29862 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
29864 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29866 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
29874 \begin_layout Subsection
29875 Grouping Index Entries
29876 \begin_inset Index idx
29879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29888 \begin_layout Standard
29889 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
29891 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
29892 lists under the entry
29893 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29897 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29901 First we create the entry
29902 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29906 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29910 \begin_inset space ~
29914 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29916 reference "subsec:Lists"
29921 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
29922 \begin_inset space ~
29926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29928 reference "sec:Itemize"
29932 , we insert the command
29935 \begin_layout Standard
29941 \begin_layout Standard
29945 \begin_layout Standard
29951 \begin_layout Standard
29952 for the enumerated list in section
29953 \begin_inset space ~
29957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29959 reference "sec:Enumerate"
29966 \begin_layout Standard
29967 The exclamation mark
29968 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29972 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29975 marks the grouping levels.
29976 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
29977 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
29978 If we don't have an index entry for
29979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29986 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
29989 \begin_layout Subsection
29991 \begin_inset Index idx
29994 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29995 Index ! Page ranges
30003 \begin_layout Standard
30004 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30006 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30007 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30008 an index entry in section
30009 \begin_inset space ~
30013 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30015 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30022 \begin_layout Standard
30025 Paragraph environments|(
30028 \begin_layout Standard
30029 and another entry at the end of section
30030 \begin_inset space ~
30034 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30036 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30043 \begin_layout Standard
30046 Paragraph environments|)
30049 \begin_layout Standard
30051 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30063 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30071 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30074 respectively start and end the index range.
30075 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30076 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30077 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30078 An example is the index entry
30079 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30082 Document ! Settings
30083 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30089 \begin_layout Subsection
30091 \begin_inset Index idx
30094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30095 Index ! Cross referencing
30103 \begin_layout Standard
30104 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30105 We referred for example in the index entry
30106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30114 \begin_inset space ~
30118 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30120 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30124 ) to the index entry
30125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30132 in the same section using the entry
30135 \begin_layout Standard
30138 GIF|see{Image formats}
30141 \begin_layout Standard
30142 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30144 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30145 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30148 \begin_layout Subsection
30150 \begin_inset Index idx
30153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30154 Index ! Entry order
30162 \begin_layout Standard
30163 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30164 follow the rules for the index order.
30165 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30170 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30171 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30173 \begin_inset space ~
30177 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30179 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30188 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30189 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30190 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30194 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30210 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30214 \begin_inset Index idx
30217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30218 Dummy entries ! maïs
30224 \begin_inset Index idx
30227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30228 Dummy entries ! maître
30234 \begin_inset Index idx
30237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30238 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30243 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30244 maïs, maison, maître.
30245 To achieve this, we use the command
30248 \begin_layout Standard
30251 previous entry@current entry
30254 \begin_layout Standard
30255 In our case we want to have
30256 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30260 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30264 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30271 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30274 \begin_layout Standard
30280 \begin_layout Standard
30281 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30282 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30284 See the next subsection for an example.
30287 \begin_layout Standard
30288 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30294 \begin_layout Standard
30295 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30300 to generate the index (see section
30301 \begin_inset space ~
30305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30307 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30316 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30317 -package aeguill in section
30318 \begin_inset space ~
30322 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30324 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30328 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30329 -packages although all these index
30330 commands start with
30331 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30344 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30349 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30352 \begin_layout Standard
30364 \begin_layout Standard
30376 \begin_layout Subsection
30378 \begin_inset Index idx
30381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30382 Index ! Entry layout
30390 \begin_layout Standard
30391 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30392 \begin_inset Index idx
30395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30398 This is an italic dummy entry
30403 You can also format the page number using the character
30404 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30411 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30412 -command without a backslash.
30413 We can write for example
30416 \begin_layout Standard
30419 italic page number:|textit
30422 \begin_layout Standard
30423 to get the page number in italic.
30424 \begin_inset Index idx
30427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30428 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30433 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30434 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30436 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30444 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30452 \begin_inset space ~
30458 Have a look at section
30459 \begin_inset space ~
30463 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30465 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30469 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30473 \begin_layout Standard
30474 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30482 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30486 to generate the index, see section
30487 \begin_inset space ~
30491 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30493 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30502 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30507 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30508 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30511 key "latexcompanion"
30524 \begin_layout Standard
30525 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30527 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30528 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30529 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30530 If so, put the following in the preamble
30533 \begin_layout Standard
30545 \begin_layout Standard
30549 \begin_layout Standard
30555 \begin_layout Standard
30556 in the index entry.
30557 \begin_inset Index idx
30560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30561 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30566 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30567 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30568 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30571 \begin_layout Standard
30572 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30573 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30574 a bold font for all index entries.
30575 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30587 documentation for details,
30588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30590 key "makeindex,xindy"
30598 \begin_layout Subsection
30600 \begin_inset Index idx
30603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30610 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30612 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30619 \begin_layout Standard
30620 If the index generation program
30624 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30625 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30629 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30630 distribution, is used.
30634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30639 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
30640 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
30641 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
30642 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
30643 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
30653 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
30655 dialog, see section
30656 \begin_inset space ~
30660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30662 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
30667 The available options are listed and explained in
30668 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30670 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
30676 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
30680 \begin_layout Standard
30681 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
30682 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
30685 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30686 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30690 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
30691 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
30694 \begin_layout Subsection
30698 \begin_layout Standard
30699 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
30700 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
30701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30705 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30708 next to the standard index.
30710 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
30711 that add this feature.
30718 \begin_inset Index idx
30721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30723 packages ! splitidx
30728 package to generate multiple indexes.
30729 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
30734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30735 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
30737 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30745 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30746 style, but it also includes
30747 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
30748 Please consult the package's manual for details.
30756 \begin_layout Standard
30757 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
30758 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
30760 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
30761 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
30764 and select the option
30766 Use multiple Indexes
30773 already contains the standard index
30774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30782 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
30783 also appear as a heading) to the
30787 input field and press the
30792 The new index now also appears in the list.
30793 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
30794 label color to the new index.
30797 \begin_layout Standard
30798 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
30801 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30808 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
30809 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
30810 are additional features:
30813 \begin_layout Itemize
30814 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
30815 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
30818 \begin_layout Itemize
30819 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
30820 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
30821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30825 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30828 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
30829 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
30830 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
30831 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
30834 \begin_layout Section
30835 Nomenclature/Glossary
30836 \begin_inset Index idx
30839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30846 \begin_inset Index idx
30849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30878 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30880 name "sec:Nomenclature"
30887 \begin_layout Standard
30888 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
30889 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
30890 called nomenclature or glossary.
30893 \begin_layout Standard
30894 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30901 \begin_inset Index idx
30904 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30912 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
30914 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30921 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
30925 \begin_layout Standard
30926 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
30927 and then use the menu
30929 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30935 \begin_inset space ~
30940 or the toolbar button
30943 arg "nomencl-insert"
30948 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30956 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30959 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
30962 \begin_layout Standard
30963 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
30964 The first is the term or
30968 that you wish to define.
30973 of the term or symbol.
30976 \begin_layout Standard
30977 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30985 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
30986 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
30994 \begin_layout Subsection
30995 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
30996 \begin_inset Index idx
30999 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31000 Nomenclature ! Layout
31008 \begin_layout Standard
31009 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31013 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31016 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31020 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31024 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31028 \begin_inset Newline newline
31036 \begin_inset Newline newline
31042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31049 character starts/ends the formula.
31050 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31051 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31053 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31059 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31063 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31073 \begin_layout Standard
31074 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31075 -syntax is given in section
31076 \begin_inset space ~
31080 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31082 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31089 \begin_layout Standard
31093 \begin_inset space ~
31098 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31100 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31101 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31105 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31109 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31112 in this document is:
31113 \begin_inset Newline newline
31118 dummy entry for the character
31123 \begin_inset Newline newline
31135 \begin_inset space ~
31145 font use the command
31174 \begin_layout Standard
31175 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31180 \begin_inset space \space{}
31184 \begin_inset Newline newline
31200 \begin_inset Newline newline
31203 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31204 This command will make the font of all symbols
31211 \begin_inset space ~
31219 \begin_layout Standard
31220 If the characters |
31221 \begin_inset space \space{}
31225 \begin_inset space \space{}
31229 \begin_inset space \space{}
31233 \begin_inset space \space{}
31237 \begin_inset space \space{}
31240 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31241 a quote character in front of them.
31242 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31243 LatexCommand nomenclature
31244 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31245 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31253 \begin_layout Subsection
31254 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31255 \begin_inset Index idx
31258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31259 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31267 \begin_layout Standard
31268 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31269 -code of the symbol
31271 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31273 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31276 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31277 LatexCommand nomenclature
31279 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31287 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31291 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31292 LatexCommand nomenclature
31295 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31301 They will be sorted by
31302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31310 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31314 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31324 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31328 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31331 will be sorted before the
31335 since the character
31336 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31340 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31343 is considered in sorting.
31346 \begin_layout Standard
31347 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31350 \begin_inset space ~
31355 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31356 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31358 For the example given, you can insert
31362 in this field for the
31363 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31370 will be located before
31371 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31377 \begin_layout Standard
31378 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31383 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31393 \begin_layout Subsection
31394 Nomenclature Options
31395 \begin_inset Index idx
31398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31399 Nomenclature ! Options
31407 \begin_layout Standard
31412 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31413 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31416 \begin_layout Description
31417 refeq Appends the phrase
31418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31430 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31433 to every nomenclature entry, where
31439 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31442 \begin_layout Description
31443 refpage Appends the phrase
31444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31459 to every nomenclature entry, where
31465 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31468 \begin_layout Description
31469 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31472 \begin_layout Standard
31473 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31474 class options list in the
31476 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31480 In this document the options
31487 \begin_layout Standard
31488 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31494 \begin_layout Standard
31495 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31496 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31501 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31504 \begin_layout Description
31514 \begin_layout Description
31517 nomrefpage Like the
31524 \begin_layout Description
31527 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31536 \begin_layout Description
31540 \begin_inset space ~
31546 \begin_inset space ~
31551 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31554 \begin_layout Standard
31556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31563 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31564 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31568 \begin_layout Standard
31576 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31579 \begin_inset Newline newline
31586 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31591 \begin_inset Newline newline
31595 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31610 by their translation.
31613 \begin_layout Subsection
31614 Printing the Nomenclature
31615 \begin_inset Index idx
31618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31619 Nomenclature ! Printing
31627 \begin_layout Standard
31628 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31630 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31631 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31636 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31644 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31647 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
31648 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
31649 You can choose between these settings:
31652 \begin_layout Description
31653 Default a space of 1
31654 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31660 \begin_layout Description
31662 \begin_inset space ~
31666 \begin_inset space ~
31669 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
31672 \begin_layout Description
31673 Custom custom space
31676 \begin_layout Standard
31677 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
31678 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31682 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31686 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
31694 For example, in order to change the name to
31698 , add the following line to the preamble:
31701 \begin_layout Standard
31709 nomname}{List of Symbols}
31712 \begin_layout Subsection
31713 Nomenclature Program
31714 \begin_inset Index idx
31717 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31718 Nomenclature ! Program
31724 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31726 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
31733 \begin_layout Standard
31739 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
31740 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
31742 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
31747 by adding options, see section
31748 \begin_inset space ~
31752 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31754 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31759 The available options are listed and explained in
31760 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31762 key "nomencl,makeindex"
31770 \begin_layout Section
31772 \begin_inset Index idx
31775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31782 \begin_inset Index idx
31785 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31786 Document ! Branches
31792 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31794 name "sec:Branches"
31801 \begin_layout Standard
31802 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
31803 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
31804 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
31805 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
31808 \begin_layout Standard
31809 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
31810 allows you to put text into branches.
31811 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
31812 To create a branch, either select the menu
31814 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31815 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
31818 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
31820 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31827 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
31828 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
31829 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
31830 and whether the name of the branch should
31831 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
31832 (see below for an example).
31833 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
31834 to the name of the other) and to add
31835 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31839 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31843 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31847 \begin_inset space ~
31850 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
31851 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
31854 \begin_layout Standard
31855 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
31856 These boxes are inserted via the menu
31858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31861 where you can choose a branch.
31862 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
31866 \begin_layout Standard
31867 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
31868 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
31871 \begin_layout Standard
31872 \begin_inset Branch Question
31876 \begin_layout Standard
31881 Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
31889 \begin_layout Standard
31890 \begin_inset Branch Answer
31894 \begin_layout Standard
31899 Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
31907 \begin_layout Standard
31914 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31915 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31918 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
31919 Consider for example a file
31920 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31924 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31927 which has the above branches.
31929 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31933 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31936 is active, the PDF export file would be called
31937 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31941 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31945 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31949 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31953 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31957 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31960 branch were inactive,
31961 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31965 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31969 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31973 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31976 branch was active, likewise
31977 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31981 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31985 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31989 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31992 branch was active, and
31993 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31996 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
31997 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32000 if both branches were active.
32001 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32002 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32008 \begin_layout Standard
32009 There are also inverted branch insets, whose content is output just in case
32015 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32016 To control whether a particular inset is inverted, right-click on the inset
32020 \begin_inset space ~
32028 \begin_layout Standard
32029 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32033 \begin_layout Standard
32039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32046 branch is deactivated.
32052 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32058 \begin_layout Standard
32059 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32060 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32061 definitions for each branch.
32062 For example you can define for the question branch
32066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32067 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32068 -syntax, see section
32069 \begin_inset space ~
32073 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32075 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32087 \begin_layout Standard
32097 \begin_layout Standard
32107 \begin_layout Standard
32108 and for the answer branch
32111 \begin_layout Standard
32121 \begin_layout Standard
32131 \begin_layout Standard
32132 \begin_inset Branch Question
32136 \begin_layout Standard
32140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32149 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32168 \begin_layout Standard
32169 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32173 \begin_layout Standard
32177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32205 \begin_layout Standard
32206 Now it is possible to use the
32210 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32217 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32220 commands to obtain conditional output.
32221 Here is an example formula where only the
32228 \begin_inset Formula
32230 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32238 \begin_layout Standard
32239 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32247 \begin_layout Standard
32248 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32250 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32254 \begin_inset space \space{}
32257 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32259 For this advanced usage, see the
32265 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32270 \begin_layout Section
32272 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32274 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32279 \begin_inset Index idx
32282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32291 \begin_layout Standard
32294 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32295 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32298 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32300 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32306 \begin_inset Index idx
32309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32311 packages ! hyperref
32316 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32317 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32318 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32319 part of the document.
32323 \begin_layout Standard
32324 The header information in the dialog tab
32328 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32329 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32330 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32331 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32335 \begin_inset space ~
32339 \begin_inset space ~
32344 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32345 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32346 and author entries.
32350 \begin_inset space ~
32354 \begin_inset space ~
32358 \begin_inset space ~
32363 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32366 \begin_layout Standard
32367 You can specify in the dialog tab
32371 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32376 \begin_inset space ~
32380 \begin_inset space ~
32384 \begin_inset space ~
32389 option allows long links to be split;
32392 \begin_inset space ~
32396 \begin_inset space ~
32400 \begin_inset space ~
32408 \begin_inset space ~
32413 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32416 \begin_inset space ~
32421 colors the different links.
32422 The default colors are:
32425 \begin_layout Labeling
32426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32431 for hyperlinks and URLs
32434 \begin_layout Labeling
32435 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32443 \begin_layout Labeling
32444 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32453 but you can change these in the field
32458 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32461 \begin_layout Standard
32464 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32467 \begin_layout Standard
32472 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32473 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32474 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32477 \begin_layout Standard
32482 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32483 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32484 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32494 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32495 when opening the PDF.
32497 \begin_inset space ~
32500 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32501 \begin_inset space ~
32504 1 will only display the sections.
32507 \begin_layout Standard
32508 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32509 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32515 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32516 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32526 \begin_layout Section
32528 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32530 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32532 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32539 \begin_layout Subsection
32542 \begin_inset Index idx
32545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32553 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32555 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32562 \begin_layout Standard
32563 As \SpecialChar LyX
32564 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32565 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32566 commands and constructs,
32569 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32570 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32571 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32572 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32573 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32574 cannot support all packages and
32578 \begin_layout Standard
32579 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32580 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32581 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32585 Code box is created by the menu
32587 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32589 \begin_inset space ~
32594 or by the toolbar button
32607 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32615 \begin_layout Standard
32616 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32618 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32620 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word
32624 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32625 The LyX way would be to use a framed box.
32630 and are therefore using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32637 , you can write the command part
32643 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32644 Code box before the word and the closing brace
32648 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
32649 Code box behind the word.
32650 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
32651 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
32655 \begin_layout Standard
32656 \begin_inset Graphics
32657 filename clipart/ERT.png
32665 \begin_layout Standard
32669 \begin_layout Standard
32670 This is a line with a
32674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32697 \begin_layout Standard
32698 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
32701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32706 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
32707 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
32708 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
32709 know that the command is finished.
32717 \begin_layout Subsection
32718 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32720 \begin_inset Argument 1
32723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32724 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
32731 \begin_inset Index idx
32734 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32742 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32744 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32751 \begin_layout Standard
32752 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
32753 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32754 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
32755 uses in the background.
32756 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
32757 is based on commands, you can
32758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32766 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
32767 any time if you know the right commands.
32768 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
32769 is the end of the day.
32770 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
32771 all caption labels bold.
32772 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
32774 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
32778 \begin_layout Standard
32779 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
32781 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32783 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32796 \begin_layout Standard
32797 As result you find that the package
32802 \begin_inset Index idx
32805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32813 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
32815 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32818 \SpecialChar menuseparator
32822 \begin_inset space ~
32830 \begin_layout Standard
32835 usepackage[options]{package name}
32838 \begin_layout Standard
32839 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
32840 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
32841 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
32842 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
32845 \begin_layout Standard
32846 In your case the package name is
32851 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
32856 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
32857 So you add the command
32860 \begin_layout Standard
32865 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
32868 \begin_layout Standard
32869 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
32873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32874 For more commands provided by the
32878 package, have a look at its documentation,
32879 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32894 \begin_layout Standard
32895 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
32897 For example if you use a
32901 class, you don't need the package
32905 , you can instead write
32908 \begin_layout Standard
32913 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
32918 \begin_layout Standard
32919 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
32920 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
32921 documentation of the document class you want to use.
32928 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
32931 \begin_layout Standard
32932 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
32933 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
32935 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32936 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
32937 Code box as described in the previous
32941 \begin_layout Standard
32942 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
32943 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32946 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32948 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
32956 \begin_layout Standard
32957 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
32963 \begin_layout Standard
32967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32977 \begin_inset Note Note
32980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32981 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
32989 \begin_layout Left Header
32990 \begin_inset Argument 1
32993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33003 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33013 \begin_inset Note Note
33016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33017 defines the header line as described below
33025 \begin_layout Center Header
33026 \begin_inset Argument 1
33029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33038 \begin_layout Right Header
33039 \begin_inset Argument 1
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33063 \begin_layout Left Footer
33064 \begin_inset Argument 1
33067 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33088 \begin_layout Center Footer
33089 \begin_inset Argument 1
33092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33104 \begin_inset Newline newline
33108 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33114 \begin_layout Right Footer
33115 \begin_inset Argument 1
33118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33140 \begin_layout Section
33141 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33142 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33144 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33149 \begin_inset Index idx
33152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33153 Document ! Header/Footer line
33159 \begin_inset Index idx
33162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33171 \begin_layout Standard
33172 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33176 \begin_inset space ~
33187 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33193 \begin_inset space ~
33199 As a second step add in the menu
33201 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33202 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33206 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33211 Custom Header/Footerlines
33214 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33218 This module offers the following 6
33219 \begin_inset space ~
33225 \begin_layout Description
33227 \begin_inset space ~
33231 \begin_inset space ~
33235 \begin_inset space ~
33239 \begin_inset space ~
33243 \begin_inset space ~
33249 \begin_layout Description
33251 \begin_inset space ~
33255 \begin_inset space ~
33259 \begin_inset space ~
33263 \begin_inset space ~
33267 \begin_inset space ~
33273 \begin_layout Standard
33274 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33275 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33278 \begin_layout Standard
33279 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33280 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33282 \begin_inset space ~
33286 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33288 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33292 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33295 \begin_layout Standard
33296 \begin_inset Float figure
33302 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33305 \begin_inset Tabular
33306 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33307 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33308 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33309 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33310 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33312 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33321 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33324 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33330 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33333 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33341 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33344 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33359 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33370 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33374 The normal text on the page goes here.
33375 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33377 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33378 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33383 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33392 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33395 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33403 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33406 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33412 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33415 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33421 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33432 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33450 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33468 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33471 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33473 name "fig:Page-layout"
33477 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33490 \begin_layout Standard
33491 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33499 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33503 \begin_inset space ~
33508 is set to “Default”.
33509 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33518 \begin_layout Subsection
33522 \begin_layout Standard
33523 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33524 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33525 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33526 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33528 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33530 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33533 \begin_layout Standard
33534 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33535 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33539 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33541 \begin_inset space ~
33549 \begin_layout Description
33552 thepage prints the current page number
33555 \begin_layout Description
33558 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33561 \begin_layout Description
33564 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33567 \begin_layout Description
33570 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33571 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33574 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33578 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33581 because it usually goes in a left header.
33584 \begin_layout Description
33587 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33588 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33590 It is normally used in the right header.
33593 \begin_layout Subsection
33594 Default header/footer
33597 \begin_layout Standard
33598 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33599 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33600 footer has the page number.
33601 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33602 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33603 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33606 \begin_inset space ~
33614 \begin_layout Subsection
33618 \begin_layout Standard
33619 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33620 Some pages are different.
33621 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33622 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33623 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33624 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33625 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33628 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33629 Header and footer decoration line
33632 \begin_layout Standard
33633 By default, you get a 0.4
33634 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33637 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33638 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
33650 in the following way:
33653 \begin_layout Standard
33660 headrulewidth}{thickness}
33663 \begin_layout Standard
33664 where thickness is a size in standard units like
33677 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
33678 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33684 \begin_layout Standard
33685 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33687 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
33688 \begin_inset space ~
33692 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33702 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33703 Several header/footer lines
33706 \begin_layout Standard
33707 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
33708 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
33709 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
33711 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33726 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33727 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33729 \begin_inset space ~
33737 \begin_layout Standard
33744 headheight}{height}
33747 \begin_layout Standard
33752 is a size in standard units (e.
33753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33757 \begin_inset space \space{}
33765 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
33766 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
33767 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33768 logfile with the menu
33770 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33772 \begin_inset space ~
33780 \begin_inset space ~
33785 to see if you can find a warning about the package
33790 \begin_inset Index idx
33793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33795 packages ! fancyhdr
33801 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
33802 for your header/footer.
33805 \begin_layout Subsection
33809 \begin_layout Standard
33810 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
33811 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
33812 This example consists of the following definition:
33815 \begin_layout Description
33817 \begin_inset space ~
33826 , empty optional argument
33829 \begin_layout Description
33831 \begin_inset space ~
33834 Header empty, empty optional argument
33837 \begin_layout Description
33839 \begin_inset space ~
33848 in the optional argument
33851 \begin_layout Description
33853 \begin_inset space ~
33862 in the optional argument
33865 \begin_layout Description
33867 \begin_inset space ~
33880 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33884 \begin_inset Newline newline
33888 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33892 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33895 in the optional argument
33898 \begin_layout Description
33900 \begin_inset space ~
33909 , empty optional argument
33912 \begin_layout Description
33915 headrulewidth set to 2
33916 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33922 \begin_layout Standard
33923 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
33924 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
33930 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33940 \begin_layout Standard
33941 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
33947 \begin_layout Standard
33951 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33955 pagestyle{headings}
33961 \begin_inset Note Note
33964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33965 switches back to page style with the default headings
33973 \begin_layout Section
33974 Previewing Snippets of your Document
33975 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33977 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
33982 \begin_inset Index idx
33985 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33992 \begin_inset Index idx
33995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34004 \begin_layout Standard
34006 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34007 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34008 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34011 \begin_layout Subsection
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34022 \begin_inset Index idx
34025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34027 packages ! preview-latex
34032 (on some systems named simply
34037 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34039 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34046 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34048 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34056 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34057 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34058 -package are automatically
34059 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34063 \begin_layout Subsection
34067 \begin_layout Standard
34068 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34069 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34071 activate the option
34074 \begin_inset space ~
34081 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34087 \begin_inset space ~
34091 \begin_inset space ~
34094 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34101 \begin_inset space ~
34114 \begin_inset space ~
34119 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34122 \begin_layout Standard
34123 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34128 \begin_inset space ~
34136 \begin_inset space ~
34144 \begin_layout Standard
34145 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34146 and when you finish
34150 \begin_layout Standard
34151 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34159 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34160 generated by activating the option
34163 \begin_inset space ~
34169 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34177 \begin_layout Subsection
34178 Selected document parts
34181 \begin_layout Standard
34182 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34183 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34184 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34185 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34187 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34189 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34193 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34194 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34195 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34198 \begin_layout Standard
34199 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34206 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34218 is explained in section
34220 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34225 \begin_inset space ~
34235 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34236 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34237 the final rotated boxes,
34238 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34239 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34241 Here is the result:
34244 \begin_layout Standard
34245 \begin_inset Preview
34247 \begin_layout Standard
34252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34256 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34262 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34272 height_special "totalheight"
34277 backgroundcolor "none"
34280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34305 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34311 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34318 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34333 \begin_layout Standard
34334 Previewing works also for colors.
34335 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34354 is explained in section
34361 \begin_inset space ~
34374 \begin_layout Standard
34375 \begin_inset Preview
34377 \begin_layout Standard
34381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34396 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34400 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34405 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34424 \begin_layout Standard
34425 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34431 \begin_layout Standard
34432 If \SpecialChar LyX
34433 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34434 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34435 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34436 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34437 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34438 the \SpecialChar TeX
34440 If \SpecialChar LyX
34441 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34442 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34444 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34445 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34446 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34449 \begin_layout Subsection
34454 \begin_layout Standard
34455 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34456 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34459 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34461 \begin_inset space ~
34466 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34468 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34470 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34471 's main window, then only this selection
34472 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34473 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34474 the source view window.
34479 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34480 ; but note that if you have
34481 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34483 not just the one which is open at the time.
34486 \begin_layout Section
34487 Advanced Find and Replace
34488 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34490 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34495 \begin_inset Index idx
34498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34505 \begin_inset Index idx
34508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34517 \begin_layout Subsection
34521 \begin_layout Standard
34522 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34523 allows for searching of complex,
34524 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34526 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34527 The key-features are:
34530 \begin_layout Itemize
34531 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34532 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34533 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34537 \begin_layout Itemize
34538 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34539 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34540 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34541 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34544 \begin_layout Itemize
34545 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34546 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34547 outside of mathematics environments
34550 \begin_layout Itemize
34551 Search may be widened to a specific
34556 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34560 \begin_inset space ~
34563 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34564 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34571 \begin_layout Itemize
34572 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34573 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34574 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34578 \begin_inset space ~
34581 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34584 \begin_layout Subsection
34588 \begin_layout Standard
34589 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34591 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34604 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34607 ) or the toolbar button
34610 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34616 Advanced Find and Replace
34621 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34625 \begin_layout Standard
34631 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34635 \begin_inset space ~
34640 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34643 arg "paragraph-break"
34647 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34648 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
34652 arg "paragraph-break"
34655 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
34659 searches backwards.
34662 \begin_layout Standard
34666 \begin_inset space ~
34671 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
34680 \begin_inset space ~
34685 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
34688 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34689 Searching for mathematics
34692 \begin_layout Standard
34693 Mathematical formulas, such as
34694 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
34697 or something more complex like
34698 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
34701 , may be searched for by typing them in the
34706 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
34707 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
34708 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
34709 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
34715 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34719 \begin_layout Standard
34720 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
34721 This is done by switching to the
34725 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
34730 This way, entering in the
34737 \begin_layout Itemize
34738 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
34739 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
34742 \begin_layout Itemize
34743 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
34744 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
34747 \begin_layout Itemize
34748 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
34749 of it only within section headings.
34750 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
34751 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
34755 \begin_layout Itemize
34756 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
34757 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
34760 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34764 \begin_layout Standard
34765 The entries made in the
34769 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
34772 \begin_inset space ~
34778 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
34782 button or alternatively press
34785 arg "paragraph-break"
34792 while the cursor is in the
34795 \begin_inset space ~
34803 \begin_layout Standard
34804 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
34806 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
34810 \begin_layout Itemize
34811 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
34812 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
34813 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34820 with its typewriter version
34821 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34829 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34835 \begin_layout Itemize
34836 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
34838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34842 \begin_inset Formula $R$
34846 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34850 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34854 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
34858 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34861 (you may want to enable the
34864 \begin_inset space ~
34872 \begin_inset space ~
34877 options and disable the
34885 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
34886 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34890 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34893 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
34894 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
34898 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
34901 , or occurrences of
34902 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
34906 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
34912 \begin_layout Subsection
34916 \begin_layout Standard
34917 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
34921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34922 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
34924 \begin_inset CommandInset href
34926 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
34936 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
34942 This is done with the context menu
34944 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34945 Insert Regular Expression
34947 while the cursor is in the
34952 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
34953 expression matching rules
34957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34958 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
34961 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34965 \begin_inset space ~
34968 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
34969 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
34975 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
34976 same text in the document.
34977 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
34978 Examples of using such a feature may be:
34981 \begin_layout Enumerate
34982 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
34987 editor the fraction
34988 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
34992 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
34995 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
34996 fractions with the given denominator.
34999 \begin_layout Enumerate
35000 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35012 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35017 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35018 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35019 Also, by inserting a
35020 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35023 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35024 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35027 \begin_layout Standard
35028 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35029 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35030 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35033 , and referring back to them through
35034 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35038 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35042 For example, try searching with the regexp
35043 \begin_inset Newline newline
35046 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35049 \begin_inset Newline newline
35052 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35055 \begin_layout Standard
35056 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35059 \begin_layout Standard
35060 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35068 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35069 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35070 sub-expressions is absolute.
35072 \begin_inset space ~
35076 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35079 always refers to the first occurrence of
35080 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35083 in all entered regexps.
35091 \begin_layout Section
35093 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35095 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35100 \begin_inset Index idx
35103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35112 \begin_layout Standard
35114 has a built-in spell checker.
35117 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35124 key or the toolbar button
35127 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35130 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35131 beginning of the currently selected text.
35132 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35133 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35134 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35135 scrolled so that it is visible.
35136 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35137 n, if any could be found.
35138 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35142 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35143 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35146 \begin_layout Standard
35147 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35154 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35155 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35157 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35158 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35161 \begin_inset space ~
35169 arg "dialog-show character"
35172 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35174 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35177 \begin_layout Standard
35178 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35179 can be downloaded from here:
35180 \begin_inset Newline newline
35184 \begin_inset Flex URL
35187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35189 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35195 \begin_inset Newline newline
35199 \begin_inset space ~
35202 files for each language.
35203 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35204 \begin_inset space ~
35207 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35208 's installation subfolder
35216 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35218 \begin_inset Newline newline
35221 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35222 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35223 but in most cases these are
35239 is the language code.
35242 \begin_layout Subsection
35246 \begin_layout Standard
35249 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35250 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35252 \begin_inset space ~
35255 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35258 you can set the following things:
35261 \begin_layout Description
35263 \begin_inset space ~
35266 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35267 should use for spell checking.
35268 Depending on your platform,
35282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35283 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35284 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35299 \begin_inset space ~
35302 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35305 \begin_layout Description
35307 \begin_inset space ~
35310 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35311 will always use the given language
35312 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35315 \begin_layout Description
35317 \begin_inset space ~
35320 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35326 \begin_inset space \space{}
35330 This should normally not be needed.
35333 \begin_layout Description
35335 \begin_inset space ~
35339 \begin_inset space ~
35342 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35344 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35348 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35354 \begin_layout Description
35356 \begin_inset space ~
35359 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35360 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35361 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35362 appear in a context menu.
35363 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35367 \begin_layout Description
35369 \begin_inset space ~
35373 \begin_inset space ~
35377 \begin_inset space ~
35380 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35384 \begin_layout Section
35386 \begin_inset Index idx
35389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35396 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35398 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35405 \begin_layout Standard
35407 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35408 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35418 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35420 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35430 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35432 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35433 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35434 which are available for many languages.
35437 \begin_layout Standard
35438 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35439 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35443 \begin_layout Subsection
35444 Setting up the thesaurus
35447 \begin_layout Standard
35456 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35460 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35465 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35471 \begin_inset space ~
35479 For instance, the US English files are named:
35482 \begin_layout Itemize
35486 \begin_layout Itemize
35490 \begin_layout Standard
35499 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35500 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35503 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35504 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35505 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35507 \begin_inset space ~
35512 ) to the path where they are installed.
35516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35517 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35518 ies, typical locations are
35524 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35528 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35532 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35535 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35541 LibreOffice-<Version>
35548 On the Mac, the default location is
35550 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35551 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35552 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35553 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35554 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35555 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35563 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35564 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35565 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35569 \begin_layout Standard
35570 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35571 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35575 \begin_layout Itemize
35576 \begin_inset Flex URL
35579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35581 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35589 \begin_layout Standard
35590 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35591 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35593 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35594 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35595 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35597 \begin_inset space ~
35602 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35604 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35605 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35609 \begin_layout Standard
35610 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35612 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35615 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35621 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35624 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35625 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35627 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35633 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35634 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35635 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35637 \begin_inset space ~
35642 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35645 \begin_layout Subsection
35646 Using the thesaurus
35649 \begin_layout Standard
35650 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35652 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35655 or the toolbar button
35658 arg "thesaurus-entry"
35661 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
35663 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
35665 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
35666 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
35667 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
35676 ), related terms (such as
35679 \begin_inset space ~
35688 ), compounds (such as
35691 \begin_inset space ~
35700 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
35709 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
35712 \begin_layout Standard
35713 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
35714 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
35718 \begin_layout Standard
35719 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
35720 the dictionary, such as the above
35724 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
35725 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35729 \begin_inset space \space{}
35732 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
35733 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
35734 For example, looking up the word form
35738 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
35743 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
35744 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35748 \begin_inset space \space{}
35759 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
35760 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
35761 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
35764 \begin_layout Section
35766 \begin_inset Index idx
35769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35776 \begin_inset Index idx
35779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35780 Document ! Change Tracking
35786 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35788 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
35795 \begin_layout Standard
35796 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
35797 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
35798 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
35799 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
35801 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35803 \begin_inset space ~
35806 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35808 \begin_inset space ~
35816 \begin_layout Standard
35817 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
35831 The color depends on the author that made the change.
35832 You can change the color in
35834 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35835 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35837 \begin_inset space ~
35841 \begin_inset space ~
35846 \SpecialChar menuseparator
35852 \begin_inset Index idx
35855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35856 Color ! Change tracking
35861 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
35862 's status bar when the
35863 cursor is in changed text.
35864 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
35867 arg "changes-merge"
35873 \begin_layout Standard
35874 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
35876 \begin_inset Index idx
35879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35888 \begin_layout Standard
35889 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35895 \begin_layout Standard
35896 \begin_inset Graphics
35897 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
35905 \begin_layout Standard
35906 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35912 \begin_layout Standard
35913 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
35916 \begin_layout Standard
35917 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
35923 \begin_layout Standard
35924 \begin_inset Tabular
35925 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
35926 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
35927 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35928 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
35929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35938 arg "changes-track"
35946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35952 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35954 \begin_inset space ~
35957 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35959 \begin_inset space ~
35968 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
35969 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35972 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35977 arg "changes-output"
35985 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
35988 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35993 \begin_inset space ~
35996 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
35998 \begin_inset space ~
36002 \begin_inset space ~
36006 \begin_inset space ~
36015 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36016 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36032 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36036 Jumps to the next change
36042 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36043 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36046 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36051 arg "change-accept"
36059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36065 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36067 \begin_inset space ~
36070 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36072 \begin_inset space ~
36081 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36082 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36085 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36090 arg "change-reject"
36098 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36104 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36106 \begin_inset space ~
36109 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36111 \begin_inset space ~
36120 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36129 arg "changes-merge"
36137 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36140 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36143 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36145 \begin_inset space ~
36148 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36159 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36160 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36168 arg "all-changes-accept"
36176 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36179 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36182 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36184 \begin_inset space ~
36187 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36189 \begin_inset space ~
36193 \begin_inset space ~
36202 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36203 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36206 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36211 arg "all-changes-reject"
36219 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36225 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36227 \begin_inset space ~
36230 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36232 \begin_inset space ~
36236 \begin_inset space ~
36245 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36268 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36269 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36271 \begin_inset space ~
36280 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36303 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36305 \begin_inset space ~
36321 \begin_layout Standard
36322 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36328 \begin_layout Standard
36329 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36349 \begin_layout Standard
36350 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36351 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36352 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36353 the next change after the current cursor position.
36354 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36355 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36356 step to the next change.
36357 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36360 \begin_layout Standard
36361 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36362 to describe a change.
36365 \begin_layout Standard
36366 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36372 \begin_inset Index idx
36375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36383 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36385 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36392 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36396 \begin_layout Section
36397 Comparison of Documents
36398 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36400 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36405 \begin_inset Index idx
36408 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36409 Comparison of documents
36417 \begin_layout Standard
36418 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36421 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36425 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36426 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36428 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36430 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36434 \begin_inset space ~
36438 \begin_inset space ~
36442 \begin_inset space ~
36451 \begin_inset space ~
36455 \begin_inset space ~
36459 \begin_inset space ~
36463 \begin_inset space ~
36467 \begin_inset space ~
36471 \begin_inset space ~
36476 enables the change tracking option
36479 \begin_inset space ~
36483 \begin_inset space ~
36487 \begin_inset space ~
36492 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36495 \begin_layout Section
36496 International Support
36497 \begin_inset Index idx
36500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36501 International support
36509 \begin_layout Standard
36510 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36511 with any language you want.
36512 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36513 up \SpecialChar LyX
36515 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36517 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36525 \begin_layout Standard
36526 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36527 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36528 \begin_inset space ~
36532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36534 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36541 \begin_layout Subsection
36543 \begin_inset Index idx
36546 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36553 \begin_inset Index idx
36556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36557 Document ! Settings
36563 \begin_inset Index idx
36566 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36567 Document ! Language
36575 \begin_layout Standard
36578 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36579 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36582 dialog lets you set
36584 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36589 \begin_layout Standard
36594 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36599 \begin_inset space ~
36604 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36605 For details about the different encoding options see section
36606 \begin_inset space ~
36610 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36612 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36619 \begin_layout Subsection
36620 Keyboard mapping configuration
36621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36623 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36630 \begin_layout Standard
36631 If you have for example a U.
36632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36635 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36636 can use an alternate keymap.
36637 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36642 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36643 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36644 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36647 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36648 \begin_inset space ~
36652 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36654 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
36659 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
36660 which one you want to use.
36663 \begin_layout Standard
36664 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
36665 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
36666 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
36667 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36670 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
36671 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
36672 one to support the characters you want.
36673 This and many other customizations are explained in the
36680 \begin_layout Chapter
36683 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36685 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
36692 \begin_layout Standard
36693 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
36694 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
36695 topic inside the user's guide.
36698 \begin_layout Section
36700 \begin_inset Index idx
36703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36712 \begin_layout Standard
36717 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
36720 \begin_layout Subsection
36724 \begin_layout Standard
36725 Creates a new document.
36728 \begin_layout Subsection
36732 \begin_layout Standard
36733 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
36734 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
36735 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
36738 \begin_layout Subsection
36742 \begin_layout Standard
36746 \begin_layout Subsection
36750 \begin_layout Standard
36751 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
36752 Click there on a file to open it.
36755 \begin_layout Subsection
36759 \begin_layout Standard
36760 Closes the current document.
36763 \begin_layout Subsection
36767 \begin_layout Standard
36768 Closes all opened documents.
36771 \begin_layout Subsection
36775 \begin_layout Standard
36776 Saves the actual document.
36779 \begin_layout Subsection
36783 \begin_layout Standard
36784 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
36787 \begin_layout Subsection
36791 \begin_layout Standard
36792 Saves all opened documents.
36795 \begin_layout Subsection
36799 \begin_layout Standard
36800 Reloads the actual document from disk.
36803 \begin_layout Subsection
36807 \begin_layout Standard
36808 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
36809 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
36810 It is described in the section
36812 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
36817 Additional Features
36822 \begin_layout Subsection
36826 \begin_layout Standard
36827 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
36828 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
36830 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
36831 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
36835 \begin_layout Standard
36836 When using the menu entry
36839 \begin_inset space ~
36844 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
36848 \begin_inset space ~
36852 \begin_inset space ~
36856 \begin_inset space ~
36861 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
36862 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
36865 \begin_layout Subsection
36867 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36869 name "subsec:Export"
36876 \begin_layout Standard
36877 You can export your document to various file formats.
36878 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
36880 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
36881 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
36882 during its configuration.
36885 \begin_layout Standard
36886 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
36888 \begin_inset space ~
36892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36894 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
36901 \begin_layout Description
36907 \begin_inset space ~
36910 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
36912 \begin_inset space ~
36915 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
36916 \begin_inset Newline newline
36919 Since \SpecialChar LyX
36920 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
36924 \begin_layout Description
36925 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
36931 \begin_layout Description
36933 \begin_inset space ~
36936 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
36942 \begin_layout Description
36943 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
36944 's native DVI-format.
36945 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
36946 files paths or file names in your document.
36948 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
36955 \begin_layout Description
36956 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
36957 in files paths or file names
36960 \begin_layout Description
36962 \begin_inset space ~
36969 ) DVI-format using the program
36971 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
36974 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
36978 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
36981 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36986 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
36994 \begin_layout Description
36996 \begin_inset space ~
36999 (cropped) the same as
37003 but with cropped page margins.
37006 \begin_layout Description
37008 \begin_inset space ~
37011 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37015 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37020 \begin_layout Description
37024 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37032 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37040 \begin_layout Description
37042 \begin_inset space ~
37046 \begin_inset space ~
37049 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37053 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37061 \begin_layout Description
37065 \begin_inset space ~
37074 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37075 source that is compilable with the program
37077 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37081 \begin_layout Description
37085 \begin_inset space ~
37090 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37091 source, additionally all images used in the document
37092 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37096 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37099 \begin_layout Description
37103 \begin_inset space ~
37108 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37109 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37110 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37118 \begin_layout Description
37122 \begin_inset space ~
37131 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37132 source that is compilable with the program
37138 \begin_layout Description
37140 \begin_inset space ~
37144 \begin_inset space ~
37151 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37152 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37158 \begin_layout Description
37160 \begin_inset space ~
37163 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37164 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37166 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37170 \begin_inset space \space{}
37175 \begin_inset space ~
37179 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37183 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37194 represent the version number)
37197 \begin_layout Description
37199 \begin_inset space ~
37203 \begin_inset space ~
37206 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37207 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37208 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37212 \begin_layout Description
37213 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37214 's internal XHTML engine
37217 \begin_layout Description
37219 \begin_inset space ~
37223 \begin_inset space ~
37227 \begin_inset space ~
37231 \begin_inset space ~
37234 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37239 For the conversion the program
37248 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37251 \begin_layout Description
37252 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37257 \begin_layout Description
37259 \begin_inset space ~
37262 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37264 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37267 For the conversion the program
37276 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37279 \begin_layout Description
37281 \begin_inset space ~
37284 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37285 For the conversion the program
37294 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37297 \begin_layout Description
37299 \begin_inset space ~
37302 (cropped) the same as
37305 \begin_inset space ~
37310 but with cropped page margins
37313 \begin_layout Description
37317 \begin_inset space ~
37322 PDF-format using the program
37326 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37329 \begin_layout Description
37333 \begin_inset space ~
37337 \begin_inset space ~
37345 \begin_inset space ~
37350 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37351 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37355 \begin_inset space \space{}
37358 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37362 \begin_layout Description
37366 \begin_inset space ~
37371 PDF-format using the program
37373 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37376 , produces PDF-files directly
37379 \begin_layout Description
37383 \begin_inset space ~
37388 PDF-format using the program
37392 , produces PDF-files directly
37395 \begin_layout Description
37399 \begin_inset space ~
37404 PDF-format using the program
37408 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37411 \begin_layout Description
37415 \begin_inset space ~
37420 PDF-format using the program
37425 , produces PDF-files directly
37428 \begin_layout Description
37432 \begin_inset space ~
37440 \begin_layout Description
37444 \begin_inset space ~
37448 \begin_inset space ~
37453 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37454 and then exported as text using the program
37459 \begin_layout Description
37464 PostScript format using the program
37472 options see section
37473 \begin_inset space ~
37477 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37479 reference "subsec:General-output"
37486 \begin_layout Description
37487 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37488 source and also code in the statistical programming
37502 it is possible to use
37506 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37510 \begin_layout Standard
37511 If one of the menu entries
37518 \begin_inset space ~
37527 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37529 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37531 \begin_inset space ~
37535 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37537 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37542 \begin_inset Index idx
37545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37546 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37555 \begin_layout Subsection
37559 \begin_layout Standard
37560 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37561 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37570 reference "sec:Paths"
37575 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37584 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37585 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37586 's preferences as described in section
37587 \begin_inset space ~
37591 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37593 reference "subsec:Converters"
37600 \begin_layout Subsection
37601 New and Close Window
37604 \begin_layout Standard
37605 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37609 \begin_layout Subsection
37613 \begin_layout Standard
37614 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37617 \begin_layout Section
37619 \begin_inset Index idx
37622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37631 \begin_layout Subsection
37635 \begin_layout Standard
37636 Described in section
37637 \begin_inset space ~
37641 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37643 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37650 \begin_layout Subsection
37651 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37654 \begin_layout Standard
37655 Described in section
37656 \begin_inset space ~
37660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37662 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37669 \begin_layout Subsection
37673 \begin_layout Standard
37674 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
37675 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
37678 \begin_layout Subsection
37682 \begin_layout Standard
37683 Selects the whole document.
37686 \begin_layout Subsection
37687 Find & Replace (Quick)
37690 \begin_layout Standard
37691 Described in section
37692 \begin_inset space ~
37696 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37698 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
37705 \begin_layout Subsection
37706 Find & Replace (Advanced)
37709 \begin_layout Standard
37710 Described in section
37711 \begin_inset space ~
37715 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37717 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
37724 \begin_layout Subsection
37725 Move Paragraph Up/Down
37728 \begin_layout Standard
37729 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
37733 \begin_layout Subsection
37737 \begin_layout Standard
37738 Described in section
37739 \begin_inset space ~
37743 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37745 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
37752 \begin_layout Subsection
37754 \begin_inset Index idx
37757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37758 Paragraph ! Settings
37766 \begin_layout Standard
37767 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
37768 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
37772 \begin_layout Standard
37773 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
37774 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
37780 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
37781 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
37783 \begin_inset space ~
37791 \begin_layout Subsection
37792 Table and Rows & Columns
37795 \begin_layout Standard
37796 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
37797 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
37798 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
37801 \begin_layout Subsection
37805 \begin_layout Standard
37806 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
37807 It will dissolve this inset.
37808 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
37812 \begin_layout Subsection
37816 \begin_layout Standard
37817 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
37818 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
37821 \begin_layout Subsection
37822 Increase/Decrease List Depth
37825 \begin_layout Standard
37826 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
37828 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
37829 \begin_inset space ~
37833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37835 reference "sec:Nesting"
37840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37842 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
37849 \begin_layout Subsection
37852 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
37855 \begin_layout Standard
37856 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
37857 nts of the same type.
37859 \begin_inset space ~
37863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37865 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
37869 for an explanation.
37872 \begin_layout Section
37874 \begin_inset Index idx
37877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37886 \begin_layout Standard
37887 At the bottom of the
37891 menu the opened documents are listed.
37894 \begin_layout Subsection
37895 Open/Close all Insets
37898 \begin_layout Standard
37899 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
37902 \begin_layout Subsection
37903 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
37906 \begin_layout Standard
37907 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
37910 \begin_layout Standard
37911 Math macros are described in the
37918 \begin_layout Subsection
37922 \begin_layout Standard
37923 Shows the outline window as described in sections
37924 \begin_inset space ~
37928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37930 reference "sec:Navigating"
37935 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37937 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
37944 \begin_layout Subsection
37948 \begin_layout Standard
37949 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
37951 \begin_inset space ~
37955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37957 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
37964 \begin_layout Subsection
37968 \begin_layout Standard
37969 Opens a window showing console messages.
37970 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
37972 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37975 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
37976 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
37977 is processing the document.
37980 \begin_layout Subsection
37982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37984 name "subsec:Toolbars"
37989 \begin_inset Index idx
37992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38001 \begin_layout Standard
38002 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38003 All toolbars and the
38006 \begin_inset space ~
38011 can be turned on and off.
38016 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38028 \begin_inset space ~
38040 \begin_inset space ~
38045 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38049 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38056 \begin_layout Standard
38061 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38065 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38066 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38067 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38068 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38069 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38072 \begin_layout Standard
38074 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38075 \begin_inset space ~
38079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38081 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38088 \begin_layout Subsection
38092 \begin_layout Standard
38096 \begin_inset space ~
38100 \begin_inset space ~
38104 \begin_inset space ~
38108 \begin_inset space ~
38112 \begin_inset space ~
38116 \begin_inset space ~
38121 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38122 's main window vertically while
38125 \begin_inset space ~
38129 \begin_inset space ~
38133 \begin_inset space ~
38137 \begin_inset space ~
38141 \begin_inset space ~
38145 \begin_inset space ~
38150 will split it horizontally.
38151 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38152 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38153 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38154 three or more documents at the same time.
38155 To close a split view, use the menu
38158 \begin_inset space ~
38162 \begin_inset space ~
38170 \begin_layout Subsection
38174 \begin_layout Standard
38175 Closes a split view.
38178 \begin_layout Subsection
38182 \begin_layout Standard
38183 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38184 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38185 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38186 's main window fullscreen.
38187 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38188 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38191 \begin_layout Section
38193 \begin_inset Index idx
38196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38205 \begin_layout Subsection
38209 \begin_layout Standard
38210 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38211 \begin_inset space ~
38215 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38217 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38228 \begin_layout Subsection
38230 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38232 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38239 \begin_layout Standard
38240 Here you can insert the following characters:
38243 \begin_layout Description
38248 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38251 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38252 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38253 -packages you have installed.
38254 You can get a complete display by checking
38257 \begin_inset space ~
38263 \begin_inset Newline newline
38267 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38275 Not all characters will be visible in the
38279 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38280 dialog (see section
38281 \begin_inset space ~
38285 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38287 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38291 ) can display every character.
38299 \begin_layout Description
38300 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38304 \begin_layout Description
38306 \begin_inset space ~
38310 \begin_inset space ~
38313 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38314 \begin_inset space ~
38318 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38320 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38327 \begin_layout Description
38329 \begin_inset space ~
38332 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38335 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38336 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38342 \begin_layout Description
38344 \begin_inset space ~
38347 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38350 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38351 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38357 \begin_layout Description
38359 \begin_inset space ~
38362 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38366 \begin_layout Description
38368 \begin_inset space ~
38371 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38375 \begin_layout Description
38377 \begin_inset space ~
38380 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38386 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38392 \begin_layout Description
38394 \begin_inset space ~
38397 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38401 \begin_layout Description
38403 \begin_inset space ~
38407 \begin_inset Index idx
38410 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38417 \begin_inset Index idx
38420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38421 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38426 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38427 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38429 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38435 \begin_inset Index idx
38438 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38446 \begin_inset Newline newline
38449 More information about this feature can be found in the
38455 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38461 \begin_layout Description
38462 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38464 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38465 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38469 \begin_layout Subsection
38473 \begin_layout Standard
38474 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38477 \begin_layout Description
38478 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38479 \begin_inset script superscript
38481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38490 \begin_layout Description
38491 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38492 \begin_inset script subscript
38494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38503 \begin_layout Description
38505 \begin_inset space ~
38508 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38509 \begin_inset space ~
38513 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38515 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38522 \begin_layout Description
38524 \begin_inset space ~
38527 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38528 \begin_inset space ~
38532 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38534 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38541 \begin_layout Description
38543 \begin_inset space ~
38546 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38547 \begin_inset space ~
38551 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38553 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38560 \begin_layout Description
38562 \begin_inset space ~
38565 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38567 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38571 \begin_inset space \space{}
38574 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38575 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38581 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38584 To insert a fraction use the command
38589 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38593 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38599 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38602 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38609 \begin_layout Description
38611 \begin_inset space ~
38614 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38615 \begin_inset space ~
38619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38621 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38628 \begin_layout Description
38630 \begin_inset space ~
38633 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38634 \begin_inset space ~
38638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38640 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38647 \begin_layout Description
38649 \begin_inset space ~
38652 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38653 \begin_inset space ~
38657 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38659 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
38666 \begin_layout Description
38667 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
38668 \begin_inset space ~
38672 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38674 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
38681 \begin_layout Description
38683 \begin_inset space ~
38686 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
38687 \begin_inset space ~
38691 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38693 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
38700 \begin_layout Description
38702 \begin_inset space ~
38705 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
38706 \begin_inset space ~
38710 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38712 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
38719 \begin_layout Description
38721 \begin_inset space ~
38725 \begin_inset space ~
38728 Break Inserts a line break point (zero-width space character) that is invisible
38731 \begin_inset space ~
38735 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38737 reference "subsec:Dashes-and-line-breaks"
38744 for a usage example.
38747 \begin_layout Description
38749 \begin_inset space ~
38753 \begin_inset space ~
38756 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
38757 \begin_inset space ~
38761 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38763 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38770 \begin_layout Description
38772 \begin_inset space ~
38775 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
38776 as described in section
38777 \begin_inset space ~
38781 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38783 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
38790 \begin_layout Description
38792 \begin_inset space ~
38795 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
38796 \begin_inset space ~
38800 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38802 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38809 \begin_layout Description
38811 \begin_inset space ~
38814 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
38815 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
38817 \begin_inset space ~
38821 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38823 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
38830 \begin_layout Description
38832 \begin_inset space ~
38835 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
38836 \begin_inset space ~
38840 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38842 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38849 \begin_layout Description
38851 \begin_inset space ~
38855 \begin_inset space ~
38858 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
38859 \begin_inset space ~
38863 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38865 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
38872 \begin_layout Subsection
38876 \begin_layout Standard
38877 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
38881 \begin_inset space ~
38902 are described in section
38903 \begin_inset space ~
38907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38909 reference "sec:toc"
38918 is described in section
38919 \begin_inset space ~
38923 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38925 reference "sec:Index"
38933 is described in section
38934 \begin_inset space ~
38938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38940 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
38946 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
38949 is described in section
38950 \begin_inset space ~
38954 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38956 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
38963 \begin_layout Subsection
38967 \begin_layout Standard
38968 To insert floats, as described in section
38969 \begin_inset space ~
38973 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38975 reference "sec:Floats"
38979 and in detail the chapter
38986 \begin_inset space ~
38994 \begin_layout Subsection
38998 \begin_layout Standard
38999 To insert notes, described in section
39000 \begin_inset space ~
39004 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39006 reference "sec:Notes"
39013 \begin_layout Subsection
39017 \begin_layout Standard
39018 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39020 Branches are described in section
39021 \begin_inset space ~
39025 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39027 reference "sec:Branches"
39034 \begin_layout Subsection
39038 \begin_layout Standard
39039 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39040 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39042 An example is the document class
39043 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39047 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39050 with three custom insets.
39053 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39057 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39063 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39066 \begin_layout Subsection
39068 \begin_inset Index idx
39071 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39080 \begin_layout Standard
39081 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39083 For more information see chapter
39085 External Document Parts
39088 \begin_inset space ~
39094 \begin_layout Subsection
39096 \begin_inset Index idx
39099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39108 \begin_layout Standard
39109 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39110 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39117 \begin_inset space ~
39125 \begin_layout Subsection
39129 \begin_layout Standard
39134 dialog as described in section
39135 \begin_inset space ~
39139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39141 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39148 \begin_layout Subsection
39152 \begin_layout Standard
39157 as described in section
39158 \begin_inset space ~
39162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39164 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39171 \begin_layout Subsection
39175 \begin_layout Standard
39180 as described in section
39181 \begin_inset space ~
39185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39187 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39194 \begin_layout Subsection
39196 \begin_inset Index idx
39199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39206 \begin_inset Index idx
39209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39210 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39218 \begin_layout Standard
39219 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39220 Floats are described in section
39221 \begin_inset space ~
39225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39227 reference "sec:Floats"
39231 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39233 Multi-page Captions
39238 \begin_inset space ~
39246 \begin_layout Subsection
39250 \begin_layout Standard
39251 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39252 \begin_inset space ~
39256 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39258 reference "sec:Index"
39265 \begin_layout Subsection
39269 \begin_layout Standard
39270 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39271 \begin_inset space ~
39275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39277 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39284 \begin_layout Subsection
39288 \begin_layout Standard
39289 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39290 Tables are described in section
39291 \begin_inset space ~
39295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39297 reference "sec:Tables"
39301 and in detail in the chapter
39308 \begin_inset space ~
39316 \begin_layout Subsection
39320 \begin_layout Standard
39326 Graphics are described in section
39327 \begin_inset space ~
39331 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39333 reference "sec:Graphics"
39340 \begin_layout Subsection
39344 \begin_layout Standard
39345 Inserts a URL as described in section
39346 \begin_inset space ~
39350 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39352 reference "subsec:URLs"
39359 \begin_layout Subsection
39363 \begin_layout Standard
39364 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39365 \begin_inset space ~
39369 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39371 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39378 \begin_layout Subsection
39382 \begin_layout Standard
39383 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39384 \begin_inset space ~
39388 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39390 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39397 \begin_layout Subsection
39401 \begin_layout Standard
39402 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39403 \begin_inset space ~
39407 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39409 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39416 \begin_layout Subsection
39420 \begin_layout Standard
39421 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39422 title or caption of a float.
39423 Inserts a short title as described in section
39424 \begin_inset space ~
39428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39430 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39437 \begin_layout Subsection
39442 \begin_layout Standard
39443 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39444 Code box as described in section
39445 \begin_inset space ~
39449 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39451 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39458 \begin_layout Subsection
39460 \begin_inset Index idx
39463 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39472 \begin_layout Standard
39473 Inserts a program listings box.
39474 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39476 Program Code Listings
39481 \begin_inset space ~
39489 \begin_layout Subsection
39493 \begin_layout Standard
39494 Inserts the actual date.
39495 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39500 \begin_layout Subsection
39504 \begin_layout Standard
39505 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39506 \begin_inset space ~
39510 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39512 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39519 \begin_layout Section
39521 \begin_inset Index idx
39524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39533 \begin_layout Standard
39534 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39535 \begin_inset space ~
39538 of the current document.
39539 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39542 \begin_layout Subsection
39546 \begin_layout Standard
39547 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39548 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39549 to jump, for example, between section
39550 \begin_inset space ~
39554 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39558 2.5 and use the submenu
39561 \begin_inset space ~
39565 \begin_inset space ~
39572 \begin_inset space ~
39578 \begin_inset space ~
39582 \begin_inset space ~
39588 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39592 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39598 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39601 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39604 \begin_layout Standard
39605 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39609 \begin_inset space ~
39614 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39617 \begin_inset space ~
39622 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39625 \begin_layout Subsection
39626 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39629 \begin_layout Standard
39630 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39634 \begin_layout Subsection
39638 \begin_layout Standard
39639 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39640 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39641 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39645 \begin_inset space ~
39649 \begin_inset space ~
39657 \begin_layout Subsection
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39662 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39665 The \SpecialChar LyX
39666 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
39668 \begin_inset space ~
39676 \begin_inset space ~
39681 manual for a detailed description.
39684 \begin_layout Section
39686 \begin_inset Index idx
39689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39698 \begin_layout Subsection
39702 \begin_layout Standard
39703 Change Tracking is described in section
39704 \begin_inset space ~
39708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39710 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
39717 \begin_layout Subsection
39725 \begin_layout Standard
39726 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
39727 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
39728 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39730 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
39731 to the clipboard or update the view.
39732 \begin_inset Newline newline
39735 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
39739 \begin_layout Standard
39742 Open Containing Directory
39744 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
39745 's temporary folder for the document.
39746 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
39747 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
39748 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
39749 For example some journals require to send the
39753 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39757 \begin_layout Subsection
39758 Start Appendix Here
39761 \begin_layout Standard
39762 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
39763 as described in section
39764 \begin_inset space ~
39768 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39770 reference "sec:Appendices"
39777 \begin_layout Subsection
39779 \begin_inset space ~
39785 \begin_layout Standard
39786 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
39787 default output format for the document (menu
39789 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
39790 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
39791 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
39793 \begin_inset space ~
39797 \begin_inset space ~
39803 \begin_inset space ~
39807 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39809 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
39813 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
39816 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39817 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39819 \begin_inset space ~
39822 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39824 \begin_inset space ~
39827 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39829 \begin_inset space ~
39833 \begin_inset space ~
39839 \begin_inset space ~
39843 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39845 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39849 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
39850 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39852 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39853 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39855 \begin_inset space ~
39858 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39860 \begin_inset space ~
39863 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39867 \begin_inset space ~
39871 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39873 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39878 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39879 when it is first configured.
39880 The default output format is
39883 \begin_inset space ~
39891 \begin_layout Subsection
39892 View (Other Formats)
39895 \begin_layout Standard
39896 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
39897 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
39898 actual document with an external program.
39899 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
39900 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
39901 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
39903 All possible formats are listed in section
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39908 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39910 reference "subsec:Export"
39915 You should at least see the menu entry
39920 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
39922 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
39924 \begin_inset space ~
39928 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39930 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
39935 \begin_inset Index idx
39938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39939 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
39948 \begin_layout Standard
39949 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
39950 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
39952 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
39953 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
39955 \begin_inset space ~
39958 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
39960 \begin_inset space ~
39963 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
39967 \begin_inset space ~
39971 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39973 reference "sec:File-Formats"
39978 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
39979 when it is first configured.
39982 \begin_layout Subsection
39984 \begin_inset space ~
39990 \begin_layout Standard
39991 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
39992 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
39995 \begin_layout Subsection
39996 Update (Other Formats)
39999 \begin_layout Standard
40000 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40001 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40004 \begin_layout Subsection
40005 View Master Document
40008 \begin_layout Standard
40009 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40011 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40015 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40025 \begin_inset space ~
40030 manual for more information on this topic).
40031 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40032 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset space ~
40045 generates the output of the whole book, while
40049 will just output the chapter alone.
40052 \begin_layout Standard
40053 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40054 in the document settings (menu
40056 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40057 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40058 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40060 \begin_inset space ~
40064 \begin_inset space ~
40070 \begin_inset space ~
40074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40076 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40080 ) or in the preferences (menu
40082 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40083 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40085 \begin_inset space ~
40088 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40090 \begin_inset space ~
40093 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40095 \begin_inset space ~
40099 \begin_inset space ~
40105 \begin_inset space ~
40109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40111 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40118 \begin_layout Subsection
40119 Update Master Document
40122 \begin_layout Standard
40123 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40125 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40129 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40139 \begin_inset space ~
40144 manual for more information on this topic).
40145 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40146 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40149 \begin_layout Standard
40150 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40151 in the document settings (menu
40153 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40154 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40155 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40157 \begin_inset space ~
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40167 \begin_inset space ~
40171 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40173 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40177 ) or in the preferences (menu
40179 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40180 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40182 \begin_inset space ~
40185 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40190 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40196 \begin_inset space ~
40202 \begin_inset space ~
40206 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40208 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40215 \begin_layout Subsection
40217 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40219 name "subsec:Compressed"
40226 \begin_layout Standard
40227 Un/compresses the current document.
40228 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40229 compression (see the
40231 Additional Features
40233 manual for details).
40236 \begin_layout Subsection
40240 \begin_layout Standard
40241 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40244 \begin_layout Subsection
40248 \begin_layout Standard
40249 The document settings are described in appendix
40250 \begin_inset space ~
40254 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40256 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40263 \begin_layout Section
40265 \begin_inset Index idx
40268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40277 \begin_layout Subsection
40281 \begin_layout Standard
40282 Spell checking is explained in section
40283 \begin_inset space ~
40287 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40289 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40296 \begin_layout Subsection
40300 \begin_layout Standard
40301 The thesaurus is described in section
40302 \begin_inset space ~
40306 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40308 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40315 \begin_layout Subsection
40317 \begin_inset Index idx
40320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40327 \begin_inset Index idx
40330 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40339 \begin_layout Standard
40340 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40341 the highlighted document part.
40344 \begin_layout Subsection
40350 \begin_inset Index idx
40353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40354 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40363 \begin_layout Standard
40364 Generates with the help of the program
40366 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40369 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40370 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40371 This feature is not available on Windows.
40374 \begin_layout Subsection
40380 \begin_inset Index idx
40383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40393 \begin_layout Standard
40394 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40399 \begin_inset space ~
40404 to see the full filename paths.
40407 \begin_layout Subsection
40409 \begin_inset Index idx
40412 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40421 \begin_layout Standard
40422 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40423 files as described in section
40424 \begin_inset space ~
40428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40430 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40437 \begin_layout Subsection
40439 \begin_inset Index idx
40442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40455 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40473 \begin_inset Index idx
40476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40477 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40486 \begin_layout Standard
40487 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40488 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40489 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40490 -packages and programs it needs; see
40492 \begin_inset space ~
40496 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40498 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40505 \begin_layout Subsection
40509 \begin_layout Standard
40514 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40515 \begin_inset space ~
40519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40521 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40528 \begin_layout Section
40530 \begin_inset Index idx
40533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40542 \begin_layout Standard
40543 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40544 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40546 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40550 \begin_layout Standard
40554 \begin_inset space ~
40559 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40560 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40561 packages and classes found
40562 by \SpecialChar LyX
40564 \begin_inset space ~
40568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40570 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40577 \begin_layout Standard
40581 \begin_inset space ~
40586 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40591 \begin_layout Section
40593 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40595 name "sec:Toolbars"
40602 \begin_layout Standard
40603 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40604 \begin_inset space ~
40608 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40610 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40617 \begin_layout Standard
40618 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40619 This is described in the
40621 Additional Features
40626 \begin_layout Subsection
40628 \begin_inset Index idx
40631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40640 \begin_layout Standard
40641 \begin_inset Graphics
40642 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40650 \begin_layout Standard
40651 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40657 \begin_layout Standard
40658 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40675 \begin_inset Note Note
40678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40679 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
40684 manual for more information.
40692 \begin_layout Standard
40693 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40699 \begin_layout Standard
40700 \begin_inset Tabular
40701 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
40702 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40703 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40704 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
40706 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40710 \begin_inset Graphics
40711 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
40721 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40724 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40725 pull-down box for the environments
40738 \begin_layout Standard
40739 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
40745 \begin_layout Standard
40747 \begin_inset Tabular
40748 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
40749 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
40750 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40751 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
40752 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40753 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40756 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40769 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40772 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40775 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40782 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40783 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40786 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40805 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40812 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40829 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40832 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40835 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
40842 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40851 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
40859 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40865 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40872 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40881 arg "spelling-continuously"
40889 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40892 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40893 Spellcheck continuously
40899 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40900 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40916 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40919 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40922 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40929 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40930 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40952 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40959 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40982 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
40989 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
40990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
40993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41006 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41009 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41012 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41019 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41036 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41042 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41058 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41072 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41074 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41078 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41082 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41091 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41098 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41106 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41112 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41114 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41118 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41122 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41131 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41132 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41140 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41148 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41154 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41155 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41162 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41163 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41179 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41182 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41183 Emphasize text, function of the
41185 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41187 \begin_inset space ~
41190 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41199 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41220 Set text to noun style, function of the
41222 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41224 \begin_inset space ~
41227 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41236 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41237 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41240 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41245 arg "textstyle-apply"
41253 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41256 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41257 Format text using the current settings in the
41259 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41261 \begin_inset space ~
41264 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41273 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41290 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41296 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41297 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41299 \begin_inset space ~
41308 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41317 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41331 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41338 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41345 arg "tabular-insert"
41353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41359 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41366 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41375 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41383 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41387 Toggle outline window on/off,
41389 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41396 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41405 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41417 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41432 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41440 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41444 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41457 \begin_layout Subsection
41459 \begin_inset Index idx
41462 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41471 \begin_layout Standard
41472 \begin_inset Graphics
41473 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41481 \begin_layout Standard
41482 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41488 \begin_layout Standard
41489 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41493 \begin_layout Standard
41494 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41500 \begin_layout Standard
41501 \begin_inset Tabular
41502 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41503 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41504 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41505 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41533 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41542 arg "layout Enumerate"
41550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41560 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41561 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41569 arg "layout Itemize"
41577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41587 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41604 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41614 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41615 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41623 arg "layout Description"
41631 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41634 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41641 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41650 arg "depth-increment"
41658 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41664 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41666 \begin_inset space ~
41670 \begin_inset space ~
41679 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41680 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41683 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41688 arg "depth-decrement"
41696 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41702 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41704 \begin_inset space ~
41708 \begin_inset space ~
41717 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41726 arg "float-insert figure"
41734 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41740 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41741 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41748 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41757 arg "float-insert table"
41765 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41771 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41772 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
41779 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41796 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41799 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41802 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41809 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41810 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41813 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41818 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
41826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41832 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41839 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41840 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41848 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
41856 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41859 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41862 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41869 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41870 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41894 \begin_inset space ~
41903 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41912 arg "nomencl-insert"
41920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41926 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41928 \begin_inset space ~
41937 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41946 arg "footnote-insert"
41954 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41960 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41967 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41968 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41976 arg "marginalnote-insert"
41984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41990 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41992 \begin_inset space ~
42001 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42024 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42025 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42027 \begin_inset space ~
42036 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42037 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42045 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42059 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42066 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42083 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42086 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42089 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42096 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42113 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42119 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42121 \begin_inset space ~
42130 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42139 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42147 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42150 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42153 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42154 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42161 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42170 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42178 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42184 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42185 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42187 \begin_inset space ~
42196 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42205 arg "dialog-show character"
42213 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42216 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42219 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42221 \begin_inset space ~
42224 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42240 arg "layout-paragraph"
42248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42254 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42256 \begin_inset space ~
42265 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42274 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42282 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42288 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42302 \begin_layout Subsection
42303 View/Update Toolbar
42304 \begin_inset Index idx
42307 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42308 Toolbar ! View / Update
42316 \begin_layout Standard
42317 \begin_inset Graphics
42318 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42325 \begin_layout Standard
42326 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42332 \begin_layout Standard
42333 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42337 \begin_layout Standard
42338 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42344 \begin_layout Standard
42345 \begin_inset Tabular
42346 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42347 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42348 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42349 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42350 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42351 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42354 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42367 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42373 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42380 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42381 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42389 arg "buffer-update"
42397 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42403 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42410 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42419 arg "master-buffer-view"
42427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42433 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42435 \begin_inset space ~
42444 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42453 arg "master-buffer-update"
42461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42467 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42469 \begin_inset space ~
42473 \begin_inset space ~
42482 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42491 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42505 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42506 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42507 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42508 Synchronize with Output
42514 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42538 View (Other Formats)
42544 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42551 arg "update-others"
42559 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42562 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42565 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42566 Update (Other Formats)
42579 \begin_layout Standard
42580 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42584 \begin_layout Subsection
42588 \begin_layout Standard
42589 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42590 \begin_inset space ~
42594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42596 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42600 , the table toolbar
42601 \begin_inset Index idx
42604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42613 \begin_inset space ~
42618 manual and the math macro toolbar
42619 \begin_inset Index idx
42622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42635 \begin_layout Chapter
42636 The Document Settings
42637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42639 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42644 \begin_inset Index idx
42647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42648 Document ! Settings
42656 \begin_layout Standard
42660 \begin_inset space ~
42665 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42666 is called with the menu
42668 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42672 You can save your document settings as default with the
42674 Save as Document Defaults
42676 button in any dialog.
42677 This will create a template named
42681 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
42682 when you create a new document without
42686 \begin_layout Standard
42691 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
42692 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
42695 \begin_layout Standard
42696 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
42697 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
42698 to find the one you are looking for.
42699 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
42700 the submenus of the dialog.
42702 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
42706 \begin_inset space \space{}
42710 \begin_inset Quotes eld
42714 \begin_inset Quotes erd
42717 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
42718 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
42719 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
42722 \begin_layout Section
42726 \begin_layout Standard
42727 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
42729 Document classes are described in section
42730 \begin_inset space ~
42734 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42736 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
42744 \begin_layout Standard
42748 \begin_inset space ~
42753 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
42758 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
42759 as a layout for a document class.
42760 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
42762 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
42771 \begin_layout Standard
42772 Some classes use special class options by default.
42773 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
42777 and you can decide to use them or not.
42778 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
42779 recommended you leave them untouched.
42784 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
42785 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
42790 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42792 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
42797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42798 When you want to use one of the following drivers
42799 \begin_inset Newline newline
42804 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
42807 \begin_inset Newline newline
42810 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
42811 distribution, see section
42816 \begin_inset CommandInset href
42818 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
42831 \begin_layout Standard
42836 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
42837 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
42838 in the background if the child document
42839 is opened without its master.
42840 This way child documents are always compilable.
42841 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
42848 \begin_inset space ~
42856 \begin_layout Standard
42857 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
42868 \begin_inset Index idx
42871 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42873 packages ! prettyref
42879 \begin_inset Index idx
42882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42884 packages ! refstyle
42889 for cross-references, see section
42890 \begin_inset space ~
42894 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42896 reference "sec:Cross-References"
42903 \begin_layout Section
42907 \begin_layout Standard
42908 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
42909 Please refer to the section
42912 \begin_inset space ~
42920 \begin_inset space ~
42925 manual for details.
42928 \begin_layout Section
42932 \begin_layout Standard
42933 Modules are explained in section
42934 \begin_inset space ~
42938 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42940 reference "subsec:Modules"
42947 \begin_layout Section
42951 \begin_layout Standard
42953 \begin_inset space ~
42957 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42959 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
42966 \begin_layout Section
42970 \begin_layout Standard
42971 The document font settings are described in section
42972 \begin_inset space ~
42976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42978 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
42985 \begin_layout Section
42989 \begin_layout Standard
42990 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43002 \begin_inset space ~
43007 and whether it should be a
43010 \begin_inset space ~
43015 can also be specified here.
43018 \begin_layout Standard
43019 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43020 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43021 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43023 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43026 \begin_layout Standard
43029 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43032 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43033 justifies the text on screen.
43034 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43038 \begin_layout Section
43042 \begin_layout Standard
43043 This dialog is described in sections
43044 \begin_inset space ~
43048 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43050 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43057 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43064 \begin_layout Section
43068 \begin_layout Standard
43069 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43070 \begin_inset space ~
43074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43076 reference "subsec:Margins"
43083 \begin_layout Section
43085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43087 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43092 \begin_inset Index idx
43095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43096 Language ! Encoding
43104 \begin_layout Standard
43105 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43106 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43107 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43109 is always encoded in utf8).
43110 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43111 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43112 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43113 -command is not known for
43114 a particular character).
43117 \begin_layout Standard
43118 If you use the option
43123 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43124 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43125 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43127 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43128 exactly one encoding.
43129 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43132 \begin_layout Standard
43134 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43135 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43136 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43137 installation supports Unicode), choose
43138 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43139 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43140 is quite incomplete, so
43141 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43146 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43147 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43148 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43149 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43150 -commands is not used, because all
43151 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43152 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43153 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43154 , two new alternative engines
43155 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43157 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43159 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43162 \begin_inset space ~
43170 \begin_inset space ~
43178 \begin_inset space ~
43184 \begin_inset space ~
43188 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43190 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43195 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43199 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43202 \begin_layout Standard
43206 \begin_inset space ~
43211 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43212 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43214 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43218 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43222 The possible settings are:
43225 \begin_layout Description
43226 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43228 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43229 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43233 \begin_inset space ~
43237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43239 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43246 \begin_layout Description
43247 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43248 format you will use.
43249 In many cases this will be
43254 \begin_inset Index idx
43257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43265 If the newer package
43270 \begin_inset Index idx
43273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43275 packages ! polyglossia
43280 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43281 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43282 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43284 this package will be used instead of
43291 \begin_layout Description
43293 \begin_inset space ~
43304 would be more appropriate.
43307 \begin_layout Description
43308 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43309 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43313 (for German texts), type in
43316 \begin_inset Newline newline
43321 usepackage{ngerman}
43324 \begin_layout Description
43325 None will not use a language package.
43326 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43329 \begin_layout Standard
43330 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43333 \begin_layout Description
43335 \begin_inset space ~
43339 \begin_inset space ~
43343 \begin_inset space ~
43350 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43356 \begin_inset Index idx
43359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43361 packages ! inputenc
43367 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43368 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43369 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43373 \begin_layout Description
43374 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43376 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43377 commands, which may result in a big
43378 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43379 -commands are needed.
43382 \begin_layout Description
43384 \begin_inset space ~
43388 \begin_inset space ~
43391 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43394 \begin_layout Description
43396 \begin_inset space ~
43400 \begin_inset space ~
43403 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43406 \begin_layout Description
43408 \begin_inset space ~
43411 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43414 \begin_layout Description
43416 \begin_inset space ~
43420 \begin_inset space ~
43423 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43424 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43427 \begin_layout Description
43429 \begin_inset space ~
43433 \begin_inset space ~
43436 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43440 \begin_layout Description
43442 \begin_inset space ~
43446 \begin_inset space ~
43449 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43450 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43453 \begin_layout Description
43455 \begin_inset space ~
43459 \begin_inset space ~
43463 \begin_inset space ~
43466 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43467 \begin_inset space ~
43473 \begin_layout Description
43475 \begin_inset space ~
43479 \begin_inset space ~
43483 \begin_inset space ~
43486 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43487 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43490 \begin_layout Description
43492 \begin_inset space ~
43496 \begin_inset space ~
43499 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43500 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43501 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43502 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43503 \begin_inset space ~
43507 \begin_inset space ~
43513 \begin_layout Description
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43519 \begin_inset space ~
43522 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43523 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43524 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43526 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43527 \begin_inset space ~
43531 \begin_inset space ~
43537 \begin_layout Description
43539 \begin_inset space ~
43543 \begin_inset space ~
43546 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43549 \begin_layout Description
43551 \begin_inset space ~
43555 \begin_inset space ~
43558 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43561 \begin_layout Description
43563 \begin_inset space ~
43567 \begin_inset space ~
43570 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43573 \begin_layout Description
43575 \begin_inset space ~
43578 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43581 \begin_layout Description
43583 \begin_inset space ~
43586 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43589 \begin_layout Description
43591 \begin_inset space ~
43595 \begin_inset space ~
43598 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43601 \begin_layout Description
43603 \begin_inset space ~
43607 \begin_inset space ~
43613 \begin_layout Description
43615 \begin_inset space ~
43619 \begin_inset space ~
43622 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43625 \begin_layout Description
43627 \begin_inset space ~
43631 \begin_inset space ~
43637 \begin_layout Description
43639 \begin_inset space ~
43643 \begin_inset space ~
43646 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43652 \begin_inset Index idx
43655 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43662 , when using this, set the document language to
43667 \begin_layout Description
43669 \begin_inset space ~
43673 \begin_inset space ~
43676 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43681 , when using this, set the document language to
43684 \begin_inset space ~
43690 \begin_layout Description
43692 \begin_inset space ~
43696 \begin_inset space ~
43699 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43705 \begin_inset Index idx
43708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43710 packages ! japanese
43715 , when using this, set the document language to
43720 \begin_layout Description
43722 \begin_inset space ~
43726 \begin_inset space ~
43729 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43734 , when using this, set the document language to
43739 \begin_layout Description
43741 \begin_inset space ~
43745 \begin_inset space ~
43748 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43753 , when using this, set the document language to
43758 \begin_layout Description
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43763 (EUC-KR) for Korean
43766 \begin_layout Description
43768 \begin_inset space ~
43772 \begin_inset space ~
43776 \begin_inset space ~
43779 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
43782 \begin_layout Description
43784 \begin_inset space ~
43788 \begin_inset space ~
43792 \begin_inset space ~
43795 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
43796 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
43797 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
43800 \begin_layout Description
43802 \begin_inset space ~
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43812 \begin_layout Description
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43818 \begin_inset space ~
43821 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
43822 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
43825 \begin_layout Description
43827 \begin_inset space ~
43831 \begin_inset space ~
43834 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43840 \begin_inset Index idx
43843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43850 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
43853 \begin_layout Description
43855 \begin_inset space ~
43863 \begin_inset space ~
43866 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
43873 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43876 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43883 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43884 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43886 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
43889 \begin_layout Description
43891 \begin_inset space ~
43895 \begin_inset space ~
43898 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43904 \begin_inset Index idx
43907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43914 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
43917 \begin_layout Description
43919 \begin_inset space ~
43922 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43928 \begin_inset Index idx
43931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43933 packages ! inputenc
43939 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
43943 \begin_layout Description
43945 \begin_inset space ~
43949 \begin_inset space ~
43953 \begin_inset space ~
43956 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
43957 \begin_inset space ~
43963 \begin_layout Description
43965 \begin_inset space ~
43969 \begin_inset space ~
43973 \begin_inset space ~
43976 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
43977 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
43978 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
43982 \begin_layout Description
43984 \begin_inset space ~
43988 \begin_inset space ~
43992 \begin_inset space ~
43995 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
43996 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
43999 \begin_layout Section
44001 \begin_inset Index idx
44004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44011 \begin_inset Index idx
44014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44021 \begin_inset Index idx
44024 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44025 Color ! Shaded boxes
44031 \begin_inset Index idx
44034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44035 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44043 \begin_layout Standard
44044 Here you can alter the font color for the
44048 (default: black), for
44051 \begin_inset space ~
44056 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44060 (default: white) and for
44063 \begin_inset space ~
44073 sets the color back to the default.
44076 \begin_layout Standard
44077 Clicking any button showing
44085 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44086 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44087 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44088 later more quickly.
44091 \begin_layout Standard
44092 Note, if you change the
44095 \begin_inset space ~
44100 font color and use the option
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44108 in the document settings under
44111 \begin_inset space ~
44116 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44117 \begin_inset space ~
44121 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44123 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44130 \begin_layout Standard
44131 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44137 \begin_layout Standard
44141 \begin_inset space ~
44150 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44153 \begin_inset space ~
44156 Code after a forced page break:
44159 \begin_layout Itemize
44160 For the page color:
44161 \begin_inset Newline newline
44168 pagecolor{color name}
44171 \begin_layout Itemize
44172 For the text color:
44173 \begin_inset Newline newline
44183 \begin_layout Standard
44184 You are restricted to one of
44220 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44227 \begin_inset space ~
44233 \begin_inset Newline newline
44236 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44237 names to refer to them:
44240 \begin_layout Itemize
44246 \begin_inset Newline newline
44251 page_backgroundcolor
44254 \begin_layout Itemize
44258 \begin_inset space ~
44264 \begin_inset Newline newline
44272 \begin_layout Itemize
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44282 \begin_inset Newline newline
44290 \begin_layout Itemize
44294 \begin_inset space ~
44300 \begin_inset Newline newline
44308 \begin_layout Standard
44309 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44312 \begin_inset space ~
44320 \begin_inset space ~
44328 \begin_layout Section
44332 \begin_layout Standard
44333 Here you can adjust the
44337 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44341 as described in section
44342 \begin_inset space ~
44346 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44348 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44355 \begin_layout Section
44359 \begin_layout Standard
44360 Here you can specify if a specific citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44366 \begin_inset Index idx
44369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44371 packages ! biblatex
44381 \begin_inset Index idx
44384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44396 \begin_inset Index idx
44399 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44407 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44410 Sectioned bibliography
44412 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44418 \begin_inset Index idx
44421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44423 packages ! bibtopic
44433 , you can select the style files and specify further options.
44434 Finally, you can select a document-specific
44438 for the generation of the bibliography.
44439 For a further description of these possibilities see section
44440 \begin_inset space ~
44444 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44446 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44453 \begin_layout Section
44457 \begin_layout Standard
44458 Here you can define the
44462 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44464 \begin_inset space ~
44468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44470 reference "sec:Index"
44477 \begin_layout Section
44481 \begin_layout Standard
44482 The PDF properties are explained in section
44483 \begin_inset space ~
44487 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44489 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44496 \begin_layout Section
44500 \begin_layout Standard
44501 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44502 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44508 \begin_inset Index idx
44511 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44523 \begin_inset Index idx
44526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44538 \begin_inset Index idx
44541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44553 \begin_inset Index idx
44556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44568 \begin_inset Index idx
44571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44573 packages ! mathdots
44583 \begin_inset Index idx
44586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44588 packages ! mathtools
44598 \begin_inset Index idx
44601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44613 \begin_inset Index idx
44616 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44618 packages ! stackrel
44628 \begin_inset Index idx
44631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44633 packages ! stmaryrd
44643 \begin_inset Index idx
44646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44648 packages ! undertilde
44653 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
44656 \begin_layout Description
44657 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44658 -errors in formulas,
44659 ensure that you have this enabled.
44662 \begin_layout Description
44663 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
44664 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
44665 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
44669 \begin_layout Description
44670 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
44673 \begin_inset space ~
44685 \begin_layout Description
44686 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
44689 \begin_inset space ~
44701 \begin_layout Description
44702 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
44713 \begin_layout Description
44714 mathtools is used for the math commands
44750 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
44757 \begin_layout Description
44758 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
44760 Chemical Symbols and Equations
44769 \begin_layout Description
44770 stackrel is used for the math command
44787 \begin_layout Description
44788 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
44791 \begin_layout Description
44792 undertilde is used for the math command
44800 Accents for one Character
44809 \begin_layout Section
44813 \begin_layout Standard
44814 The float placement options are described in the section
44817 \begin_inset space ~
44825 \begin_inset space ~
44833 \begin_layout Section
44837 \begin_layout Standard
44838 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
44840 Program Code Listings
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44853 \begin_layout Section
44857 \begin_layout Standard
44858 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
44866 set to be used and set the
44871 The itemize environment is described in section
44872 \begin_inset space ~
44876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44878 reference "sec:Itemize"
44885 \begin_layout Standard
44886 You can furthermore specify a
44889 \begin_inset space ~
44894 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44895 command of the desired character.
44896 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
44903 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
44905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
44909 \begin_inset space \space{}
44913 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
44923 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
44924 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
44927 \begin_layout Standard
44928 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
44931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44936 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
44937 -packages in the preamble (menu
44940 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
44941 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
44944 \begin_inset space ~
44950 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
44954 usepackage{textcomp}
44957 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
44961 usepackage{amssymb}
44971 \begin_layout Section
44975 \begin_layout Standard
44976 Branches are described in section
44977 \begin_inset space ~
44981 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44983 reference "sec:Branches"
44990 \begin_layout Section
44992 \begin_inset CommandInset label
44994 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45001 \begin_layout Standard
45002 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45005 \begin_layout Description
45007 \begin_inset space ~
45011 \begin_inset space ~
45014 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45015 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45019 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45023 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45027 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45031 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45034 View Master Document
45035 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45042 Update Master Document
45043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45050 menu or the toolbar.
45051 The default is set in
45053 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45054 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45056 \begin_inset space ~
45059 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45063 \begin_inset space ~
45067 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45069 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45076 \begin_layout Description
45078 \begin_inset space ~
45082 \begin_inset space ~
45085 Output settings for the menu
45087 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45089 \begin_inset space ~
45095 For a detailed description see section
45097 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45102 \begin_inset space ~
45110 \begin_layout Description
45112 \begin_inset space ~
45116 \begin_inset space ~
45119 Options offers settings for the export format
45127 \begin_inset space ~
45132 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45133 \begin_inset space ~
45136 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45140 \begin_inset space ~
45145 settings are described in detail in section
45147 Math Output in XHTML
45152 \begin_inset space ~
45161 \begin_inset space ~
45165 \begin_inset space ~
45170 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45173 \begin_layout Description
45175 \begin_inset space ~
45180 Save transient properties
45182 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45183 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45184 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45188 \begin_layout Itemize
45189 the activation of change tracking
45192 \begin_layout Itemize
45193 the output of tracked changes
45196 \begin_layout Itemize
45197 the recording of the document directory path.
45200 \begin_layout Standard
45201 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45202 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45206 \begin_layout Section
45214 \begin_layout Standard
45215 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45217 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45219 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45221 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45225 \begin_layout Standard
45226 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45227 -syntax is given in section
45228 \begin_inset space ~
45232 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45234 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45241 \begin_layout Chapter
45247 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45249 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45254 \begin_inset Index idx
45257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45266 \begin_layout Standard
45267 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45269 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45273 It has the following submenus.
45276 \begin_layout Section
45280 \begin_layout Subsection
45284 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45285 User Interface File
45286 \begin_inset Index idx
45289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45290 Customization ! of toolbars
45296 \begin_inset Index idx
45299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45300 Customization ! of menus
45308 \begin_layout Standard
45309 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45310 interface (ui) file.
45311 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45319 \begin_layout Description
45324 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45327 \begin_layout Description
45334 the menu entries in popup context menus
45337 \begin_layout Description
45342 specifies the toolbar buttons
45345 \begin_layout Standard
45346 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45347 and edit the entries.
45350 \begin_layout Standard
45351 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45363 entries must be finished with an explicit
45388 and in the case of the
45389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45401 The syntax for the entries is:
45404 \begin_layout Standard
45405 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45411 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45419 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45423 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45428 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45434 \begin_layout Standard
45436 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45439 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45440 -functions are listed in the menu
45442 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45452 \begin_layout Standard
45453 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45459 \begin_layout Standard
45460 For example, assuming you use the menu
45462 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45465 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45469 \begin_layout Standard
45470 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45484 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45488 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45494 \begin_layout Standard
45496 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45500 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45504 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45511 to have the sixth bookmark.
45514 \begin_layout Standard
45518 \begin_inset space ~
45523 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45524 's toolbar buttons.
45525 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45526 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45529 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45537 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45541 \begin_layout Standard
45544 Enable tool tips in main work area
45546 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45550 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45554 \begin_layout Standard
45559 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45560 should display in the menu
45562 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45564 \begin_inset space ~
45572 \begin_layout Subsection
45576 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45580 \begin_layout Standard
45583 Restore window layouts and geometries
45586 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45587 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45591 \begin_layout Standard
45594 Restore cursor positions
45596 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45600 \begin_layout Standard
45603 Load opened files from last session
45605 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45609 \begin_layout Standard
45612 Clear all session information
45614 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45615 sessions (cursor positions, names
45616 of last opened documents, etc.).
45619 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45621 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45623 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45628 \begin_inset Index idx
45631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45640 \begin_layout Standard
45643 Backup original documents when saving
45645 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
45646 it was saved the last time.
45647 It is stored in the
45650 \begin_inset space ~
45656 \begin_inset space ~
45660 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45662 reference "sec:Paths"
45666 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
45669 \begin_inset space ~
45675 The backup file has the file extension
45676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45690 \begin_layout Standard
45693 Backup documents, every
45695 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
45698 \begin_layout Standard
45701 Save documents compressed by default
45703 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
45704 \begin_inset space ~
45708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45710 reference "subsec:Compressed"
45715 This applies to newly created documents only.
45716 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
45719 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45720 Windows & work area
45723 \begin_layout Standard
45726 Open documents in tabs
45728 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
45732 \begin_layout Standard
45737 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
45742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45744 \begin_inset space ~
45748 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45750 reference "sec:Paths"
45754 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
45761 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
45762 documents will be opened in the same running instance
45763 of \SpecialChar LyX
45765 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
45766 instance is created for each file.
45769 \begin_layout Standard
45772 Single close-tab button
45774 is checked, there will only be one close button (
45784 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
45785 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
45786 Regardless of this option, one can always close a tab by middle-clicking
45790 \begin_layout Standard
45791 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45799 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
45800 before the change takes effect.
45808 \begin_layout Standard
45813 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
45815 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
45817 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
45821 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
45822 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
45823 and only want to close the view in once instance.
45826 \begin_layout Subsection
45828 \begin_inset Index idx
45831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45838 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45840 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
45847 \begin_layout Standard
45848 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
45852 \begin_layout Standard
45853 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45861 This section only deals with the fonts
45865 the \SpecialChar LyX
45867 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
45870 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45871 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45882 \begin_layout Standard
45883 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
45900 (depends on the system) as its
45903 \begin_inset space ~
45919 \begin_layout Standard
45920 You can change the font size with the
45927 \begin_layout Standard
45932 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
45934 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45937 points have the size of 1
45938 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45942 \begin_inset space ~
45946 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45948 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
45953 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
45954 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45958 The sizes are explained in detail in section
45959 \begin_inset space ~
45963 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45965 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
45972 \begin_layout Standard
45975 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
45977 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
45978 needs to redraw the screen less often.
45979 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
45980 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
45981 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
45983 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
45984 \begin_inset space ~
45990 \begin_layout Subsection
45992 \begin_inset Index idx
45995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45996 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46003 \begin_inset Index idx
46006 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46015 \begin_layout Standard
46016 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46017 by choosing an item in the
46018 list and selecting the
46025 \begin_layout Standard
46026 By checking the option
46030 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46033 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46034 \begin_inset space ~
46038 \begin_inset space ~
46043 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46046 \begin_layout Subsection
46048 \begin_inset Index idx
46051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46060 \begin_layout Standard
46061 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46065 \begin_layout Standard
46070 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46071 This feature is described in section
46072 \begin_inset space ~
46076 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46078 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46085 \begin_layout Standard
46086 Checking the option
46089 \begin_inset space ~
46093 \begin_inset space ~
46097 \begin_inset space ~
46102 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46105 \begin_layout Section
46107 \begin_inset Index idx
46110 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46119 \begin_layout Subsection
46123 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46127 \begin_layout Standard
46130 Cursor follows scrollbar
46132 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46136 \begin_layout Standard
46137 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46138 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46139 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46142 \begin_layout Standard
46145 Scroll below end of document
46147 is self-explanatory.
46150 \begin_layout Standard
46151 In \SpecialChar LyX
46152 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46159 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46161 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46162 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46165 \begin_layout Standard
46168 Sort environments alphabetically
46170 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46173 \begin_layout Standard
46176 Group environments by their category
46178 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46181 \begin_layout Standard
46186 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46197 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46201 \begin_layout Standard
46202 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46207 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46208 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46212 \begin_layout Subsection
46214 \begin_inset Index idx
46217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46224 \begin_inset Index idx
46227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46228 Settings ! Shortcuts
46236 \begin_layout Standard
46241 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46243 Several binding files are available, among them:
46246 \begin_layout Description
46247 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46250 \begin_layout Description
46251 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46263 \begin_layout Description
46264 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46275 \begin_layout Standard
46276 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46281 , and binding files for special languages.
46282 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46283 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46287 \begin_inset space \space{}
46291 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46299 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46300 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46301 will try to use the appropriate binding
46305 \begin_layout Standard
46306 Some binding files, like
46310 , only have a limited scope.
46311 When looking at the end of the file
46315 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46318 \begin_layout Standard
46322 \begin_inset space ~
46326 \begin_inset space ~
46331 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46332 in the selected key binding file.
46335 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46339 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46344 \begin_inset Index idx
46347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46348 Key Bindings ! Editing
46356 \begin_layout Standard
46357 To add new or modify existing key bindings to your own taste you can use
46358 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46359 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46360 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46363 Show key-bindings containing
46366 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46367 Insert there for example as keyword
46368 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46372 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46375 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46376 functions that contain
46377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46385 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46386 All \SpecialChar LyX
46387 functions are also listed in the file
46392 that you will find in the
46399 \begin_layout Standard
46400 For example, to add the shortcut
46408 , select the function and press the
46413 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46414 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46417 \begin_layout Standard
46418 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46419 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46421 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46422 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46424 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46429 \begin_layout Standard
46430 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46433 \begin_layout Standard
46434 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46436 The syntax of the entries is:
46439 \begin_layout Standard
46445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46449 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46458 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46464 \begin_layout Standard
46465 Note, though, that the key combination definition uses a specific syntax.
46466 This applies to the designators of specific modifier keys (e.
46467 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46494 , respectively) as well as to the other keys.
46495 Note particularly that you cannot use non-alphanumeric characters directly
46496 in the definition of the key combination, but must use commands following
46497 the Xlib standard instead (please refer to the existing bind files for
46499 So if you wanted to bind a command to the key combination
46503 , you needed to specify it as
46508 If you use the dialog to edit key bindings, you don't have to care for
46511 transforms your input to the correct syntax.
46514 \begin_layout Subsection
46516 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46518 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46523 \begin_inset Index idx
46526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46533 \begin_inset Index idx
46536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46537 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46545 \begin_layout Standard
46546 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46547 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46548 provides keyboard maps.
46549 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46550 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46553 \begin_inset space ~
46557 \begin_inset space ~
46562 and select the keyboard map file named
46569 \begin_layout Standard
46578 keyboard map and, if you use the
46582 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46585 arg "keymap-primary"
46591 arg "keymap-secondary"
46594 respectively or toggle between them with
46597 arg "keymap-toggle"
46603 \begin_layout Standard
46604 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46612 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46621 \begin_layout Standard
46622 You can also specify the mouse
46624 Wheel scrolling speed
46627 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46631 Middle mouse button pasting
46633 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46634 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46637 \begin_layout Standard
46645 \begin_inset space ~
46649 \begin_inset space ~
46654 you can select a key for zooming.
46655 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46658 \begin_layout Subsection
46662 \begin_layout Standard
46663 Input completion is described in section
46664 \begin_inset space ~
46668 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46670 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46677 \begin_layout Section
46679 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46686 \begin_inset Index idx
46689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46696 \begin_inset Index idx
46699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46708 \begin_layout Standard
46709 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
46710 are normally determined during
46712 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
46715 \begin_layout Description
46717 \begin_inset space ~
46720 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
46721 's working directory.
46722 It is the default when you
46733 \begin_inset space ~
46741 \begin_layout Description
46743 \begin_inset space ~
46746 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
46748 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46750 \begin_inset space ~
46754 \begin_inset space ~
46762 \begin_layout Description
46764 \begin_inset space ~
46767 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
46773 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
46777 \begin_inset Newline newline
46781 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46793 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
46794 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
46802 \begin_layout Description
46804 \begin_inset space ~
46808 \begin_inset Index idx
46811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46817 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
46818 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
46819 \begin_inset space ~
46823 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46825 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46833 will be used to save the backups.
46834 \begin_inset Newline newline
46837 Backup files have the ending
46838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46848 \begin_layout Description
46850 \begin_inset space ~
46853 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
46854 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
46856 \begin_inset Newline newline
46863 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
46869 You can edit this file with the program
46878 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
46879 in its preferences under
46882 \begin_inset space ~
46888 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
46893 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
46895 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
46896 in your \SpecialChar LyX
46902 and \SpecialChar LyX
46903 need to be running the same time.
46904 \begin_inset Newline newline
46907 The pipe is also used for the
46911 feature, see section
46912 \begin_inset space ~
46916 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46918 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
46923 \begin_inset Newline newline
46926 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
46927 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
46928 \begin_inset Newline newline
46944 \begin_layout Description
46946 \begin_inset space ~
46949 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
46952 \begin_layout Description
46954 \begin_inset space ~
46957 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
46958 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
46959 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
46962 \begin_layout Description
46964 \begin_inset space ~
46967 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
46973 You only need to specify it if you are using
46977 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
46979 For \SpecialChar LyX
46984 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
46988 \begin_layout Description
46990 \begin_inset space ~
46993 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
46994 When \SpecialChar LyX
46995 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
46996 to find it on the system.
46997 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
46999 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47001 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47005 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47008 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47009 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47012 \begin_layout Description
47014 \begin_inset space ~
47017 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47018 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47019 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47020 code or in the document
47022 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47024 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47025 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47026 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47027 scanned for the input files.
47028 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47029 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47031 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47032 compilation may fail for some documents.
47035 \begin_layout Section
47039 \begin_layout Standard
47040 Here you can insert your
47049 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47051 \begin_inset space ~
47055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47057 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47061 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47064 \begin_layout Section
47066 \begin_inset Index idx
47069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47070 Language ! Settings
47076 \begin_inset Index idx
47079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47080 Settings ! Language
47088 \begin_layout Subsection
47090 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47092 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47099 \begin_layout Description
47101 \begin_inset space ~
47105 \begin_inset space ~
47108 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47110 You can find its actual translation status here:
47111 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47113 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47121 \begin_layout Description
47123 \begin_inset space ~
47126 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47127 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47128 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47129 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47130 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47134 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47138 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47142 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47146 The most widespread language package is
47151 \begin_inset Index idx
47154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47161 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47163 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47164 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47165 come with the alternative
47171 \begin_inset Index idx
47174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47176 packages ! polyglossia
47181 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47182 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47188 The available selections are described in section
47189 \begin_inset space ~
47193 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47195 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47202 \begin_layout Description
47204 \begin_inset space ~
47207 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47208 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47209 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47210 An example is the start command
47216 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47218 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47222 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47238 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47243 \begin_layout Description
47245 \begin_inset space ~
47253 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47254 command toggles the package on and off.
47257 \begin_layout Description
47259 \begin_inset space ~
47263 \begin_inset space ~
47266 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47270 \begin_layout Description
47272 \begin_inset space ~
47276 \begin_inset space ~
47279 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47283 \begin_layout Description
47285 \begin_inset space ~
47289 \begin_inset space ~
47292 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47293 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47294 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47296 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47303 \begin_layout Description
47305 \begin_inset space ~
47308 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47310 When this option is not set, the
47313 \begin_inset space ~
47318 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47320 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47323 \begin_inset space ~
47331 \begin_layout Description
47333 \begin_inset space ~
47339 \begin_inset space ~
47345 When it is not set, the
47348 \begin_inset space ~
47353 is set to the end of the document.
47356 \begin_layout Description
47358 \begin_inset space ~
47362 \begin_inset space ~
47365 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47366 language will be underlined in blue.
47369 \begin_layout Description
47371 \begin_inset space ~
47375 \begin_inset space ~
47378 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47379 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47382 \begin_layout Description
47384 \begin_inset space ~
47387 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47388 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47389 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47390 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47393 \begin_layout Subsection
47397 \begin_layout Standard
47398 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47399 \begin_inset space ~
47403 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47405 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47412 \begin_layout Section
47416 \begin_layout Subsection
47418 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47420 name "subsec:General-output"
47427 \begin_layout Description
47429 \begin_inset space ~
47432 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47434 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47436 \begin_inset space ~
47442 For a detailed description see section
47444 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47449 \begin_inset space ~
47457 \begin_layout Description
47459 \begin_inset space ~
47462 Options Options for the program
47466 that is used for the export format
47471 \begin_inset space ~
47475 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47477 reference "subsec:Export"
47482 Possible options are listed in the
47487 \begin_inset Newline newline
47491 \begin_inset Flex URL
47494 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47496 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47506 \begin_layout Description
47508 \begin_inset space ~
47512 \begin_inset space ~
47515 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47518 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47519 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47521 \begin_inset space ~
47527 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47530 \begin_layout Description
47532 \begin_inset space ~
47536 \begin_inset Index idx
47539 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47546 \begin_inset Index idx
47549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47550 Settings ! Date format
47555 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47556 \begin_inset Newline newline
47560 \begin_inset Flex URL
47563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47565 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47571 \begin_inset Newline newline
47574 For example the format
47575 \begin_inset Newline newline
47579 \begin_inset Newline newline
47582 prints the date as day/month/year.
47585 \begin_layout Description
47587 \begin_inset space ~
47591 \begin_inset space ~
47594 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47595 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47598 \begin_layout Subsection
47604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47606 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47611 \begin_inset Index idx
47614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47615 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47624 \begin_layout Description
47626 \begin_inset space ~
47634 \begin_inset space ~
47638 \begin_inset space ~
47641 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47646 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47667 are used for Cyrillic.
47668 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47677 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47681 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47683 sets up in the background.
47684 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
47687 \begin_layout Description
47689 \begin_inset space ~
47693 \begin_inset space ~
47697 \begin_inset space ~
47701 \begin_inset space ~
47704 options They only have an effect when the program
47708 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
47711 \begin_layout Standard
47712 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
47713 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
47714 manuals of the applications.
47717 \begin_layout Description
47719 \begin_inset space ~
47722 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
47723 \begin_inset space ~
47727 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47729 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
47736 \begin_layout Description
47738 \begin_inset space ~
47741 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47746 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47748 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
47755 \begin_layout Description
47757 \begin_inset space ~
47760 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
47761 \begin_inset space ~
47765 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47767 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
47774 \begin_layout Description
47780 \begin_inset space ~
47783 command Command for the program
47785 Check\SpecialChar TeX
47788 that is described in the section
47790 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
47795 Additional Features
47800 \begin_layout Standard
47801 There are additionally the following options:
47804 \begin_layout Description
47806 \begin_inset space ~
47810 \begin_inset space ~
47814 \begin_inset space ~
47818 \begin_inset space ~
47823 \begin_inset space ~
47826 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
47827 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47833 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47837 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47841 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47844 to separate folders.
47845 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
47847 \begin_inset Index idx
47850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47857 \begin_inset Index idx
47860 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47869 \begin_layout Description
47871 \begin_inset space ~
47875 \begin_inset space ~
47879 \begin_inset space ~
47883 \begin_inset space ~
47887 \begin_inset space ~
47891 \begin_inset space ~
47894 changes Removes all manually set
47900 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
47901 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
47903 \begin_inset space ~
47908 dialog when changing the document class.
47911 \begin_layout Section
47913 \begin_inset space ~
47917 \begin_inset Index idx
47920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47929 \begin_layout Subsection
47931 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47933 name "subsec:Converters"
47938 \begin_inset Index idx
47941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47950 \begin_layout Standard
47951 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
47952 from one format to another.
47953 You can modify converters or create new ones.
47954 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
47961 \begin_inset space ~
47966 field and press the
47971 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
47975 \begin_inset space ~
47980 drop-down list, modify the
47984 field and press the
47991 \begin_layout Standard
47994 Converter File Cache
48000 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48002 Maximum Age (in days
48005 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48006 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48009 \begin_layout Standard
48010 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48011 definition, is described in the section
48022 \begin_layout Subsection
48024 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48026 name "sec:File-Formats"
48031 \begin_inset Index idx
48034 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48041 \begin_inset Index idx
48044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48053 \begin_layout Standard
48054 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48064 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48067 \begin_layout Standard
48068 You can also define the
48070 Default output format
48072 that is used when you use
48074 View, Update, View Master Document
48078 Update Master Document
48084 menu or the toolbar.
48087 \begin_layout Standard
48088 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48099 \begin_layout Standard
48100 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48102 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48103 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48104 This is done by specifying a
48109 More about this is described in the section
48120 \begin_layout Chapter
48121 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48123 \begin_inset Index idx
48126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48135 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48142 \begin_layout Standard
48144 \begin_inset space ~
48148 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48150 reference "tab:Units"
48154 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48155 and used in this documentation.
48158 \begin_layout Standard
48159 \begin_inset Float table
48165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48166 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48168 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48169 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48183 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48184 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48192 \begin_inset Tabular
48193 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48194 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48195 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48196 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48197 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48199 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48208 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48211 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48217 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48229 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48232 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48258 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48261 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48287 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48296 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48299 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48330 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48334 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48342 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48367 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48371 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48403 scaled point (65536
48404 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48408 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48427 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48430 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48441 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48445 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48473 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48478 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48482 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48486 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48505 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48508 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48519 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48523 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48531 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48534 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48555 % of original image width
48560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48602 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48611 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48614 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48620 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48623 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48642 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48645 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48651 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48682 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48695 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48698 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48704 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48707 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48726 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48729 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48744 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48779 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48782 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48799 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48802 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48823 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48837 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48849 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48871 \begin_layout Chapter
48873 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48875 name "chap:Credits"
48882 \begin_layout Standard
48883 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
48884 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
48887 \begin_layout Itemize
48890 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
48893 \begin_layout Itemize
48899 \begin_layout Itemize
48905 \begin_layout Itemize
48911 \begin_layout Itemize
48917 \begin_layout Itemize
48923 \begin_layout Itemize
48929 \begin_layout Itemize
48935 \begin_layout Itemize
48938 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
48941 \begin_layout Itemize
48947 \begin_layout Itemize
48953 \begin_layout Itemize
48959 \begin_layout Itemize
48965 \begin_layout Itemize
48971 \begin_layout Itemize
48977 \begin_layout Itemize
48983 \begin_layout Itemize
48989 \begin_layout Itemize
48990 The \SpecialChar LyX
48992 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49002 \begin_layout Standard
49003 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49006 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49013 \begin_layout Bibliography
49014 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49015 LatexCommand bibitem
49022 The \SpecialChar LyX
49024 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49027 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49033 \begin_inset Newline newline
49037 \begin_inset Flex URL
49040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49042 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49050 \begin_layout Bibliography
49051 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49052 LatexCommand bibitem
49053 key "latexcompanion"
49058 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49060 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49061 Companion Second Edition.
49064 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49067 \begin_layout Bibliography
49068 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49069 LatexCommand bibitem
49075 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49078 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49082 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49085 \begin_layout Bibliography
49086 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49087 LatexCommand bibitem
49096 : A Document Preparation System.
49099 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49102 \begin_layout Bibliography
49103 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49104 LatexCommand bibitem
49114 The \SpecialChar TeX
49118 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49121 \begin_layout Bibliography
49122 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49123 LatexCommand bibitem
49129 The \SpecialChar TeX
49131 \begin_inset Newline newline
49135 \begin_inset Flex URL
49138 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49140 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49148 \begin_layout Bibliography
49149 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49150 LatexCommand bibitem
49156 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49158 \begin_inset Newline newline
49162 \begin_inset Flex URL
49165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49167 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49175 \begin_layout Bibliography
49176 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49177 LatexCommand bibitem
49184 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49186 name "Documentation"
49187 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49194 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49198 \begin_inset Newline newline
49202 \begin_inset Flex URL
49205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49207 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49215 \begin_layout Bibliography
49216 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49217 LatexCommand bibitem
49224 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49226 name "Documentation"
49227 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49232 how to use the program
49234 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49238 \begin_inset Newline newline
49242 \begin_inset Flex URL
49245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49247 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49255 \begin_layout Bibliography
49256 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49257 LatexCommand bibitem
49264 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49266 name "Documentation"
49267 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49272 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49278 \begin_inset Index idx
49281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49283 packages ! biblatex
49289 \begin_inset Newline newline
49293 \begin_inset Flex URL
49296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49298 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49306 \begin_layout Bibliography
49307 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49308 LatexCommand bibitem
49315 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49317 name "Documentation"
49318 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf"
49323 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49329 \begin_inset Index idx
49332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49340 \begin_inset Newline newline
49344 \begin_inset Flex URL
49347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49349 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/biber/documentation/biber.pdf
49357 \begin_layout Bibliography
49358 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49359 LatexCommand bibitem
49366 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49368 name "Documentation"
49369 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49379 \begin_inset Newline newline
49383 \begin_inset Flex URL
49386 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49388 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49396 \begin_layout Bibliography
49397 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49398 LatexCommand bibitem
49399 key "makeindex-man"
49405 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49408 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49418 \begin_inset Newline newline
49422 \begin_inset Flex URL
49425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49427 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49435 \begin_layout Bibliography
49436 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49437 LatexCommand bibitem
49444 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49446 name "Documentation"
49447 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49457 \begin_inset Newline newline
49461 \begin_inset Flex URL
49464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49466 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49474 \begin_layout Bibliography
49475 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49476 LatexCommand bibitem
49483 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49485 name "Documentation"
49486 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49491 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49493 \begin_inset Newline newline
49497 \begin_inset Flex URL
49500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49502 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49510 \begin_layout Bibliography
49511 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49512 LatexCommand bibitem
49519 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49521 name "Documentation"
49522 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49527 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49533 \begin_inset Index idx
49536 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49544 \begin_inset Newline newline
49548 \begin_inset Flex URL
49551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49553 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49561 \begin_layout Bibliography
49562 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49563 LatexCommand bibitem
49570 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49572 name "Documentation"
49573 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49578 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49584 \begin_inset Index idx
49587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49589 packages ! enumitem
49595 \begin_inset Newline newline
49599 \begin_inset Flex URL
49602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49604 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49612 \begin_layout Bibliography
49613 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49614 LatexCommand bibitem
49621 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49623 name "Documentation"
49624 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49629 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49635 \begin_inset Index idx
49638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49640 packages ! fancyhdr
49646 \begin_inset Newline newline
49650 \begin_inset Flex URL
49653 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49655 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49663 \begin_layout Bibliography
49664 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49665 LatexCommand bibitem
49672 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49674 name "Documentation"
49675 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49680 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49686 \begin_inset Index idx
49689 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49691 packages ! hyperref
49697 \begin_inset Newline newline
49701 \begin_inset Flex URL
49704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49706 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49714 \begin_layout Bibliography
49715 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49716 LatexCommand bibitem
49723 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49725 name "Documentation"
49726 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49731 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49737 \begin_inset Index idx
49740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49748 \begin_inset Newline newline
49752 \begin_inset Flex URL
49755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49757 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49765 \begin_layout Bibliography
49766 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49767 LatexCommand bibitem
49774 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49776 name "Documentation"
49777 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
49782 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49788 \begin_inset Index idx
49791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49793 packages ! prettyref
49799 \begin_inset Newline newline
49803 \begin_inset Flex URL
49806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49808 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
49816 \begin_layout Bibliography
49817 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49818 LatexCommand bibitem
49825 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49827 name "Documentation"
49828 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
49833 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49839 \begin_inset Index idx
49842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49844 packages ! refstyle
49850 \begin_inset Newline newline
49854 \begin_inset Flex URL
49857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49859 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
49867 \begin_layout Bibliography
49868 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49869 LatexCommand bibitem
49876 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49879 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
49884 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49886 \begin_inset Newline newline
49890 \begin_inset Flex URL
49893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49895 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
49903 \begin_layout Bibliography
49904 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49905 LatexCommand bibitem
49912 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49915 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
49920 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49922 \begin_inset Newline newline
49926 \begin_inset Flex URL
49929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49931 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
49939 \begin_layout Bibliography
49940 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49941 LatexCommand bibitem
49948 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49951 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
49956 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49957 for Cyrillic languages:
49958 \begin_inset Newline newline
49962 \begin_inset Flex URL
49965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49967 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
49975 \begin_layout Bibliography
49976 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49977 LatexCommand bibitem
49984 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49987 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
49992 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
49994 \begin_inset Newline newline
49998 \begin_inset Flex URL
50001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50003 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50011 \begin_layout Bibliography
50012 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50013 LatexCommand bibitem
50020 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50023 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50028 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50030 \begin_inset Newline newline
50034 \begin_inset Flex URL
50037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50039 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50047 \begin_layout Bibliography
50048 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50049 LatexCommand bibitem
50056 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50059 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50064 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50066 \begin_inset Newline newline
50070 \begin_inset Flex URL
50073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50075 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50083 \begin_layout Bibliography
50084 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50085 LatexCommand bibitem
50092 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50095 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50100 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50102 \begin_inset Newline newline
50106 \begin_inset Flex URL
50109 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50111 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50119 \begin_layout Bibliography
50120 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50121 LatexCommand bibitem
50128 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50131 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50136 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50138 \begin_inset Newline newline
50142 \begin_inset Flex URL
50145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50147 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50155 \begin_layout Bibliography
50156 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50157 LatexCommand bibitem
50164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50167 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50172 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50174 \begin_inset Newline newline
50178 \begin_inset Flex URL
50181 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50183 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50191 \begin_layout Bibliography
50192 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50193 LatexCommand bibitem
50200 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50203 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50208 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50210 \begin_inset Newline newline
50214 \begin_inset Flex URL
50217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50219 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50227 \begin_layout Bibliography
50228 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50229 LatexCommand bibitem
50236 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50239 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50244 about new features in
50250 \begin_inset Newline newline
50254 \begin_inset Flex URL
50257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50259 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50267 \begin_layout Standard
50268 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50275 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50302 \begin_inset Note Note
50305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50312 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50313 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50314 bibliography is the second one:
50322 \begin_layout Standard
50323 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50324 LatexCommand bibtex
50325 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50326 options "biblio/alphadin"
50333 \begin_layout Standard
50334 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50338 \begin_layout Standard
50339 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50340 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50346 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50347 LatexCommand printindex